‫ﺁﻳﻨﺪﻩ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭﻱ‬

‫ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ‪ :‬ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺁﻳﻨﺪﻩ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭﻱ ﺩﻻﻟﺖ ﺑﺮ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻋﻤﻠﻲ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺍﺯ ﻳﻚ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭ ﺗـﺎ ﺁﻳﻨـﺪﻩ ﺑـﻪ ﻃـﻮﺭ‬

‫ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫ﻃﺮﺯ ﺳﺎﺧﺖ ﺩﺭ ﺯﺑﺎﻥ ﻓﺎﺭﺳﻲ ‪ :‬ﺍﮔﺮ ) ﺗﺎ ‪ +‬ﻗﻴﺪ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺁﻳﻨﺪﻩ ( ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ) ﻃﻮﻝ ﻣﺪﺕ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ‪ +‬ﺍﺳﺖ ( ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺟﻤﻼﺕ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ‬

‫ﺣﺎﻝ ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭﻱ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺁﻳﻨﺪﻩ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭﻱ ﺑﺪﺳﺖ ﻣﻲ ﺁﻳﺪ‪ .‬ﻃﺒﻖ ﻓﺮﻣﻮﻝ ﺯﻳﺮ ‪:‬‬

‫)‪(by‬ﺗﺎ‪ +‬ﻗﻴﺪ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺁﻳﻨﺪﻩ‪ +‬ﻃﻮﻝ ﻣﺪﺕ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ‪ (For) +‬ﺍﺳﺖ ‪ +‬ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭﻱ ‪ Å‬ﺁﻳﻨﺪﻩ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭﻱ‬

‫ﻃﺮﺯ ﺳﺎﺧﺖ ﺩﺭ ﺯﺑﺎﻥ ﺍﻧﮕﻠﻴﺴﻲ ‪ :‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻦ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺁﻳﻨﺪﻩ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭﻱ ﺩﺭ ﺯﺑﺎﻥ ﺍﻧﮕﻠﻴﺴﻲ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺍﺯ ﻓﺮﻣﻮﻝ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺍﺳـﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ‬

‫ﻛﺮﺩ ‪.‬‬

‫ﻗﻴﺪ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺁﻳﻨﺪﻩ ‪ + by +‬ﻃﻮﻝ ﻣﺪﺕ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ‪Subject + will have been + verb + ing+ for +‬‬

‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‪ :‬ﺗﺎ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ‪ 8‬ﺩﻭ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﻢ ﺩﺭﺱ ﻣﻲ ﺧﻮﺍﻧﻴﻢ ‪.‬‬

‫‪We will have been studying for two hours by eight o’clock.‬‬

‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‪ :‬ﺗﺎ ﻣﺎﻩ ﺁﻳﻨﺪﻩ ‪ 10‬ﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﻢ ﺩﺭ ﺗﻬﺮﺍﻥ ﺯﻧﺪﮔﻲ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ ‪.‬‬

‫‪We will have been living in tehran for ten years by next month.‬‬

‫ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ ‪ :‬ﻛﻠﻴﻪ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺩﺭ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺁﻳﻨﺪﻩ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭﻱ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻬﺪﻩ ﻓﻌﻞ ﻛﻤﻜﻲ ‪Will‬‬

‫ﻧﺸﺎﻧﻪ ﻫﺎ ‪ :‬ﻧﺸﺎﻧﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺗﺴﺖ ﺍﺯ ‪:‬‬

‫ﻗﻴﺪ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺁﻳﻨﺪﻩ ‪By +‬‬

‫‪108‬‬
 ‫ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭﻱ‬

‫ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ‪ :‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺩﻻﻟﺖ ﺑﺮ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻋﻤﻠﻲ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺍﺯ ﻳﻚ ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ﺍﻱ ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﻭ ﺗﺎ ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺍﺳـﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ‬

‫ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬

‫ﻃﺮﺯ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻦ ﺩﺭ ﺯﺑﺎﻥ ﻓﺎﺭﺳﻲ ‪ :‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﻃﻮﻝ ﻣﺪﺕ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺑﻪ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﻛﻠﻤﻪ" ﺑﻮﺩ" ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺟﻤﻼﺕ ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭﻱ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﻛﻨـﻴﻢ‬

‫ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭﻱ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺳﺖ ﻣﻲ ﺁﻳﺪ‪.‬‬

‫ﻃﻮﻝ ﻣﺪﺕ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ‪ ( For ) +‬ﺑﻮﺩ ‪ +‬ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭﻱ ‪ Å‬ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭﻱ‬

‫ﻃﺮﺯ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻦ ﺩﺭ ﺯﺑﺎﻥ ﺍﻧﮕﻠﻴﺴﻲ ‪ :‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻦ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭﻱ ﺩﺭ ﺯﺑـﺎﻥ ﺍﻧﮕﻠﻴﺴـﻲ ﺑﺎﻳـﺪ ﺍﺯ ﻓﺮﻣـﻮﻝ ﺯﻳـﺮ‬

‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ‪.‬‬

‫ﻓﺎﻋﻞ‪ + before/when +‬ﻃﻮﻝ ﻣﺪﺕ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ‪Subject + had been + verb + ing + for +‬‬

‫ﻓﻌﻞ ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ﺳﺎﺩﻩ ‪+‬‬

‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‪:‬‬

‫‪ -1‬ﻭﻗﺘﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺗﻮ ﺍﻭﻣﺪﻱ ﻧﻴﻢ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﺑﻮﺩ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻢ ﺩﺭﺱ ﻣﻲ ﺩﺍﺩﻡ‪.‬‬

‫‪I had been teaching for half an hour when you came.‬‬
‫‪ -2‬ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻨﻜﻪ ﺗﻮ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺑﺰﻧﻲ ﺩﻭ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﺑﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻢ ﺁﺷﭙﺰﻱ ﻣﻲ ﻛﺮﺩﻡ‪.‬‬

‫‪I had been doing the cooking for two hours before you called.‬‬

‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ ‪ :‬ﻛﻠﻴﻪ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺩﺭ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭﻱ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻬﺪﻩ ﻓﻌﻞ ﻛﻤﻜﻲ ‪ had‬ﻣﻲﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬

‫ﻧﺸﺎﻧﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ‪ :‬ﻧﺸﺎﻧﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ‪ before, when‬ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪109‬‬
talkative : ‫ﭘﺮ ﺣﺮﻑ‬ crowded : ‫ﺷﻠﻮﻍ‬

intelligent : ‫ﺑﺎ ﻫﻮﺵ‬ taciturn : ‫ﻛﻢ ﺣﺮﻑ‬

ugly : ‫ﺯﺷﺖ‬ rich : ‫ﺛﺮﻭﺗﻤﻨﺪ‬

considerable : ‫ﭼﺸﻤﮕﻴﺮ – ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﻣﻼﺣﻈﻪ‬

110
 ‫‪adjective‬‬ ‫ﺻﻔﺖ‬

‫ﺻﻔﺖ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻭ ﭼﮕﻮﻧﮕﻲ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻒ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﻓﺎﺭﺳﻲ ﻣﻌﻤﻮ ﹰﻻ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺳﻢ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻧﮕﻠﻴﺴﻲ ﻣﻌﻤﻮ ﹰﻻ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ‬

‫ﻼ‪:‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﻢ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺭﻭﺩ‪ .‬ﻣﺜ ﹰ‬

‫‪careful student .‬‬ ‫ﺩﺍﻧﺶ ﺁﻣﻮﺯ ﺩﻗﻴﻖ‬

‫ﻼ‬
‫ﺻﻔﺖ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻳﻚ ﻳﺎ ﺩﻭ ﻳﺎ ﭼﻨﺪ ﻛﻠﻤﻪ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺳﻢ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ‪ ،‬ﻣﺜ ﹰ‬

‫‪my new green book.‬‬ ‫ﻛﺘﺎﺏ ﺳﺒﺰ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﻡ‬

‫ﻧﻜﺘﻪ ‪ :‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﺻﻔﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﻳﺎﺑﺪ ﻭ ﻣﻨﺘﻘﻞ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﻼﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﻓﻌﻠﻬﺎﻱ ﺭﺑﻄﻲ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺭﻭﺩ‪.‬‬

‫ﺻﻔﺖ ‪ + to be +‬ﺍﺳﻢ‬

‫ﺻﻔﺖ ‪ + to get +‬ﺍﺳﻢ‬

‫ﺻﻔﺖ ‪ + to turn +‬ﺍﺳﻢ‬

‫ﺻﻔﺖ ‪ + to become +‬ﺍﺳﻢ‬

‫ﺻﻔﺖ ‪ + to grow +‬ﺍﺳﻢ‬

‫ﺻﻔﺖ ‪ + to make +‬ﺍﺳﻢ‬

‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻌﻨﻲ ) ﺑﻮﺩﻥ – ﺷﺪﻥ – ﮔﺸﺘﻦ – ﮔﺮﺩﻳﺪﻥ ( ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﺟﻨﺒﺔ ﻓﻌﻞ ﺭﺑـﻂ ﺩﺍﺭﻧـﺪ ﻛـﻪ ﺑـﻪ ﺁﻧﻬـﺎ ‪link‬‬

‫‪ verb‬ﻣﻲﮔﻮﻳﻨﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺭﺑﻂ ﻳﻚ ﺻﻔﺖ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻳﻚ ﺍﺳﻢ ﻣﻲ ﺩﻫﺪ ﻣﺜﻞ ‪:‬‬

‫‪My father grew angry .‬‬

‫‪In spring the leaves turn green‬‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﺑﻬﺎﺭ ﺑﺮﮔﻬﺎ ﺳﺒﺰ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪Today the weather got cold .‬‬ ‫ﺍﻣﺮﻭﺯ ﻫﻮﺍ ﺳﺮﺩ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬

‫ﺗﺬﮐﺮ ‪ :‬ﺍﻟﺒﺘﻪ ﻓﻌﻠﻬﺎﻱ ﺭﺑﻄﻲ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﻧﻴﺰ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻌﻨﻲ ) ﺑﻪ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺭﺳﻴﺪﻥ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ‪. ( .‬‬

‫‪Seem / Appear/ Look/ Sound/ Taste / Smell / Feel‬‬ ‫ﺻﻔﺖ ‪+‬‬

‫‪111‬‬
 ‫ﻼ‪:‬‬
‫ﺗﺬﮐﺮ ‪ :‬ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺩﺍﻧﺴﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﻓﻌﻞ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺭﺑﻄﻲ ﻫﻴﭽﮕﺎﻩ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻧﻤﻲ ﺭﻭﺩ ﻣﺜ ﹰ‬

‫‪he looks( angrily ) angry.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻭ ﻋﺼﺒﺎﻧﻲ ﺑﻪ ﻧﻈﺮ ﻣﻲ ﺭﺳﺪ ‪.‬‬

‫‪the soup tastes ( unusually ) unusual.‬‬ ‫ﺳﻮﭖ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﺑﻪ ﻧﻈﺮ ﻣﻲ ﺭﺳﺪ‪.‬‬

‫ﺻﻔﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺟﻤﻊ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻧﻤﻲ ﺭﻭﺩ ﺗﻨﻬﺎ ﺩﻭ ﺻﻔﺖ ﺍﺷـﺎﺭﻩ ‪ this, that‬ﺑـﺎ ﺍﺳـﻢ ﺑﻌـﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺧـﻮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻔـﺮﺩ ﻭ ﺟﻤـﻊ‬

‫ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻘﺖ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬

‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‪:‬‬

‫‪This book Æ‬‬ ‫‪These books .‬‬

‫‪That book Æ‬‬ ‫‪Those books .‬‬

‫ﺩﺭﺟﻪ ﺻﻔﺎﺕ ‪ :‬ﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻈﺮ ﻣﻘﺎﻳﺴﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻱ ﺳﻪ ﺩﺭﺟﻪ ﻣﻘﺎﻳﺴﻪ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ ‪ .‬ﺑﻪ ﺷﺮﺡ ﺯﻳﺮ ‪:‬‬

‫‪ -1‬ﺩﺭﺟﻪ ﻣﻄﻠﻖ ﻳﺎ ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ‪ :‬ﺩﻭ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻘﺎﻳﺴﻪ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻨﺪ ﻭ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮﻣﻲ ﺷﻨﺎﺳﻨﺪ ﻣﺜ ﹰ‬
‫ﻼ‪:‬‬

‫‪Helen is as tall as Susan.‬‬ ‫ﻫﻠﻦ ﻫﻢ ﻗﺪ ﺳﻮﺯﺍﻥ ﺍﺳﺖ ‪.‬‬

‫ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻤﺎﻥ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﺭﺟﻪ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻘﺎﻳﺴﻪ ﺑﺪﻳﻦ ﺷﺮﺡ ﺍﺳﺖ ‪:‬‬

‫‪as‬‬ ‫ﺻﻔﺖ‬ ‫‪as‬‬

‫‪not so‬‬ ‫ﺻﻔﺖ‬ ‫‪as‬‬

‫‪Hellen is as tall as Susan.‬‬

‫‪Hellen is not so tall as Susan.‬‬

‫‪-2‬ﺩﺭﺟﻪ ﺑﺮﺗﺮ ﻳﺎ ) ﺗﻔﻀﻴﻠﻲ ( ‪ :‬ﺩﻭ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻘﺎﻳﺴﻪ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ ﺍﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻲ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻬﺘﺮ ﻳﺎ ﺑﺪﺗﺮ ﻣﻌﺮﻓﻲ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬

‫ﻼ ‪ :‬ﻋﻠﻲ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻬﺮﺍﻥ ﺑﻠﻨﺪ ﻗﺪﺗﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ ‪.‬‬

‫ﻣﺜ ﹰ‬

‫‪112‬‬
‫ﻛﻠﻤﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺗﺮﺟﻤﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺑﻪ )‪ ( than‬ﻭ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﺮﺟﻤﻪ ﺗﺮ ﻗﺎﻋﺪﻩ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﻛﻠﻴﻪ ﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﻳﻚ ﺑﺨﺸﻲ ﺑﻪ ﺁﺧﺮﺷـﺎﻥ‬

‫‪ er‬ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻣﺜ ﹰ‬
‫ﻼ‪:‬‬

‫‪Hellen is taller than Susan.‬‬

‫ﺍﻣﺎ ﻛﻠﻴﻪ ﺻﻔﺘﻬﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﺳﻪ ﺑﺨﺶ ﺑﻪ ﺑﺎﻻ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﻗﺒﻠﺸﺎﻥ ) ‪ ( more‬ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫‪My book is more interesting than yours .‬‬ ‫ﻼ‪:‬‬

‫ﻣﺜ ﹰ‬

‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺻﻔﺘﻬﺎﻱ ﺩﻭ ﺑﺨﺸﻲ ﺑﻌﺪﹰﺍ ﺗﺒﺼﺮﻩ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﻢ ﺩﺍﺷﺖ‪.‬‬

‫‪ -3‬ﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﻋﺎﻟﻲ ﻳﺎ ﺩﺭﺟﻪ ﺑﺮﺗﺮﻳﻦ ‪ :‬ﭼﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻘﺎﻳﺴﻪ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ ﻭ ﺍﺯ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﻳﻜﻲ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﻬﺘﺮﻳﻦ ﻳﺎ ﺑﺮﺗﺮﻳﻦ‬

‫ﻼ ‪ :‬ﻫﻠﻦ ﺑﻠﻨﺪ ﻗﺪﺗﺮﻳﻦ ﺩﺍﻧﺶ ﺁﻣﻮﺯ ﻛﻼﺱ ﺍﺳﺖ ‪.‬‬

‫ﻣﻌﺮﻓﻲ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ ﻣﺜ ﹰ‬

‫ﭼﻮﻥ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﺭﺟﻪ ﺍﺳﻢ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﻭ ﻣﻌﺮﻓﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻛﺎﺭﺑﺮﺩ ﺣﺮﻑ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ‪ the‬ﺿﺮﻭﺭﻱ ﺍﺳـﺖ ﻭ ﺑـﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﺮﺟﻤـﻪ‬

‫ﭘﺴﻮﻧﺪ )ﺗﺮﻳﻦ( ﻗﺎﻋﺪﻩ ﺍﻳﻨﺴﺖ ﻛﻪ ﻛﻠﻴﻪ ﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﻳﻚ ﺑﺨﺸﻲ ﺑﻪ ﺁﺧﺮﺷﺎﻥ ‪ est‬ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻣﺜ ﹰ‬
‫ﻼ‪:‬‬

‫‪Hellen is the tallest student in the class .‬‬

‫ﻭﻛﻠﻴﻪ ﺻﻔﺎﺗﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﺳﻪ ﺑﺨﺶ ﺑﻪ ﺑﺎﻻ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﻗﺒﻠﺸﺎﻥ ‪ most‬ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺭﻭﺩ ﻣﺜ ﹰ‬
‫ﻼ‬

‫‪My book is the most interesting book in the library.‬‬

‫ﺗﺒﺼﺮﻩ ‪ :‬ﺑﻴﻦ ﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﺩﻭ ﺑﺨﺸﻲ ﺁﻧﻬﺎﻳﻴﻜﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺮﻑ ‪ y‬ﺧﺘﻢ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ﺩﺭ ﺗﻔﻀﻴﻠﻲ ‪er‬ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﻋﺎﻟﻲ ‪ est‬ﻣﻲ ﮔﻴﺮﻧﺪ ‪.‬‬

‫‪happy → happier than → the happiest‬‬

‫‪busy → busier than → the busiest‬‬
‫ﺍﻣﺎ ﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﺩﻭ ﺑﺨﺸﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺁﺧﺮﺷﺎﻥ ﺑﻪ ‪ y‬ﺧﺘﻢ ﻧﻤﻲﺷﻮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﺗﻔﻀﻴﻠﻲ ‪ more‬ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﻋﺎﻟﻲ ‪ most‬ﻗﺒﻠﺸﺎﻥ ﺍﺿـﺎﻓﻪ ﻣـﻲ‬

‫ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫‪Active / more active than / the most active‬‬

‫‪Comic / more comic than / the most comic‬‬

‫ﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﺑﻲ ﻗﺎﻋﺪﻩ ‪:‬ﭼﻨﺪ ﺻﻔﺖ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺩﺭ ﺗﻔﻀﻴﻠﻲ ﻭ ﻋﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﺯ ﻗﻮﺍﻋﺪﻱ ﻛﻪ ﺗﺎ ﻛﻨﻮﻥ ﺫﻛﺮ ﺷﺪ ﭘﻴﺮﻭﻱ ﻧﻤﻲ ﻛﻨﻨﺪ ﻭ ﺑﻠﻜﻪ‬

‫ﺷﻜﻞ ﺧﺎﺹ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺍﺭﻧﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪113‬‬
 ‫ﻣﻄﻠﻖ‬ ‫ﺗﻔﻀﻴﻠﻲ‬ ‫ﻋﺎﻟﻲ‬

good – well better than the best

bad - ill worse than the worst

much
many More than the most

Little Less than the least

‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻋﻀﺎﻱ ﺧﺎﻧﻮﺍﺩﻩ‬ elder ------ the eldest

old
‫ﻓﺮﺩ – ﺷﺨﺺ‬ older than the oldest
‫ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ‬ Farther than the farthest
far
‫ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ‬ Further than the furthest

114
 ‫‪The same as‬‬
‫‪ : same‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﻫﻤﺎﻫﻨﮕﻲ ﻭ ﻳﻜﺴﺎﻧﻲ ﻫﻤﻴﺸﻪ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺮﻑ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ‪ the‬ﺑـﻪ ﻛـﺎﺭ ﻣـﻲ ﺭﻭﺩ ﻭ ﻣﻌﻨـﻲ )‬

‫ﻼ‪:‬‬
‫ﻫﻤﺎﻥ – ﻳﻚ ( ﻣﻲ ﺩﻫﺪ ﻣﺜ ﹰ‬

‫‪Hellen and Jane live in the same street.‬‬

‫ﻫﻠﻦ ﻭ ﺟﻴﻦ ﺩﺭ ﻳﻚ ﺧﻴﺎﺑﺎﻥ ﺯﻧﺪﮔﻲ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻨﺪ ‪.‬‬

‫ﻧﻜﺘﻪ ﮔﺮﺍﻣﺮﻱ ‪ :‬ﺩﺭ ﺑﻌﻀﻲ ﺍﺯ ﻛﺘﺎﺑﻬﺎﻱ ﮔﺮﺍﻣﺮﻱ ﺻﻔﺎﺗﻲ ﺭﺍ ﻛﻪ ﺁﺧﺮﺷﺎﻥ ﺑﻪ ) ‪ ( er , re , le , ow‬ﺧﺘﻢ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ﺭﺍ‬

‫ﻧﻴﺰ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺻﻔﺘﻬﺎﻱ ﺩﻭ ﺑﺨﺸﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺁﺧﺮﺷﺎﻥ ﺑﻪ ‪ y‬ﺧﺘﻢ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﺗﻔﻀﻴﻠﻲ ﻭ ﻋﺎﻟﻲ ‪ er‬ﻭ ‪ est‬ﻣـﻲ ﺩﻫـﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻣـﺎ ﻫﻤـﺎﻥ‬

‫ﻛﺘﺎﺑﻬﺎﻱ ﮔﺮﺍﻣﺮﻱ ﺑﻼﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﺫﻛﺮ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻨﺪ ﻛﻪ ﭼﻨﻴﻦ ﺻﻔﺎﺗﻲ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﺎ ‪ most , more‬ﻫـﻢ ﺗﻔﻀـﻴﻠﻲ ﻭ ﻋـﺎﻟﻲ‬

‫ﻛﺮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫ﻣﻄﻠﻖ‬ ‫ﺗﻔﻀﻴﻠﻲ‬ ‫ﻋﺎﻟﻲ‬

‫‪narrow‬‬ ‫‪more narrow than‬‬ ‫‪the most narrow‬‬

‫‪narrow‬‬ ‫‪narrower than‬‬ ‫‪the narrowest‬‬
‫‪simple‬‬ ‫‪more simple than‬‬ ‫‪the most simple‬‬
‫‪simple‬‬ ‫‪simpler than‬‬ ‫‪the simplest‬‬
‫‪clever‬‬ ‫‪more clever than‬‬ ‫‪the most clever‬‬
‫‪clever‬‬ ‫‪cleverer than‬‬ ‫‪the cleverest‬‬
‫‪obscure‬‬ ‫‪more obscure than‬‬ ‫‪the most obscure‬‬
‫‪obscure‬‬ ‫‪obscurer than‬‬ ‫‪the obscurest‬‬

‫ﻗﻮﺍﻋﺪ ﺍﻣﻼﻳﻲ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺖ ‪:‬‬

‫‪ -1‬ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺘﻬﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺁﺧﺮﺷﺎﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺮﻑ ‪ y‬ﺧﺘﻢ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ﻣﺜﻞ ‪ happy‬ﻫﻨﮕـﺎﻡ ﺍﺿـﺎﻓﻪ ﺷـﺪﻥ ‪ er,est‬ﺣـﺮﻑ ‪y‬‬

‫ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺮﻑ ‪ i‬ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫‪happy → happier than → the happiest‬‬

‫‪115‬‬
‫‪-2‬ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺘﻬﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺁﺧﺮﺷﺎﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺮﻑ ‪ e‬ﺧﺘﻢ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻣﺜﻞ ‪ wide‬ﺩﺭ ﺗﻔﻀﻴﻠﻲ ﻭ ﻋﺎﻟﻲ ﻓﻘﻂ ‪ st , r‬ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﻣـﻲ‬

‫ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫‪Wide Æ wider than Æ the widest‬‬

‫‪ -3‬ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺘﻬﺎﻳﻴﻜﻪ ﻳﻚ ﺑﺨﺸﻲ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﻭ ﺁﺧﺮﺷﺎﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺮﻑ ﺑﻲ ﺻﺪﺍ ﺧﺘﻢ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺑﻪ ﺷﺮﻁ ﺍﻧﻜـﻪ ﻗﺒـﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ ﺑـﻲ‬

‫ﺻﺪﺍ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻳﻚ ﺻﺪﺍﺩﺍﺭ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻣﺜﻞ ‪ big‬ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﺷﺪﻥ ﭘﺴﻮﻧﺪﻫﺎﻱ ‪ er‬ﻭ ‪ est‬ﺣـﺮﻑ ﺑـﻲ ﺻـﺪﺍﻱ‬

‫ﺁﺧﺮ ﺗﮑﺮﺍﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫‪Big Æ bigger than Æ the biggest‬‬

‫‪crowded‬‬ ‫ﺷﻠﻮﻍ‬ ‫‪a pair of shoes‬‬ ‫ﻳﻚ ﺟﻔﺖ ﻛﻔﺶ‬

‫‪busy‬‬ ‫ﮔﺮﻓﺘﺎﺭ – ﻣﺸﻐﻮﻝ‬ ‫‪trousers‬‬ ‫ﺷﻠﻮﺍﺭ‬

‫‪noisy‬‬ ‫ﭘﺮ ﺳﺮﻭ ﺻﺪﺍ‬ ‫‪scissors‬‬ ‫ﻗﻴﭽﻲ‬

‫‪glass‬‬ ‫ﻋﻴﻨﻚ‬ ‫‪ball point pen‬‬ ‫ﺧﻮﺩﻛﺎﺭ‬

‫‪cane‬‬ ‫ﻧﯽ ‪ -‬ﻗﻠﻢ ﺧﻮﺷﻨﻮﻳﺴﻲ‬ ‫‪fountain pen‬‬ ‫ﺧﻮﺩ ﻧﻮﻳﺲ‬

‫ﺑﻘﻴﻪ ﺑﺨﺶ ‪: the same‬‬

‫) ﻣﺜﻞ – ﺷﺒﻴﻪ – ﻣﺎﻧﻨـﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ‪ the same‬ﻛﻠﻤﻪ ‪ as‬ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺭﻭﺩ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ‪ the same as‬ﺑﻪ ﻣﻌﻨﻲ‬

‫( ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭ ﻣﺘﺮﺍﺩﻑ ﺑﺎ ‪ like‬ﺍﺳﺖ ﻣﺜ ﹰ‬

‫ﻼ‪:‬‬

‫‪Your shoes are the same as mine.‬‬

‫‪116‬‬
 ‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ‪ the same‬ﻭ ﻛﻠﻤﻪ ‪ as‬ﻳﻚ ﺍﺳﻢ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺑﺪﻳﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫‪ + as‬ﺍﺳﻢ ‪the same +‬‬

‫ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻥ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺻﻔﺖ ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻫﻤﺎﻫﻨﮕﻲ ﺩﻭ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﺮﺩ ﻭﻟﻲ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺩﺍﻧﺴـﺖ ﻛـﻪ ﭼـﻮﻥ ﺑﻌـﺪ ﺍﺯ ‪the‬‬

‫‪ same‬ﻫﻤﻴﺸﻪ ﺍﺳﻢ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﻭ ﻧﻤﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺻﻔﺖ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺑﺮﺩ ﻧﺎﮔﺰﻳﺮ ﺻﻔﺖ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺑﻪ ﺍﺳﻢ ﻛﺮﺩ ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ‪:‬‬

‫‪Hellen is as old as Susan.‬‬

‫‪Hellen is the same age as Susan.‬‬

‫ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻨﺠﺎ ﻻﺯﻡ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﭼﻨﺪ ﺻﻔﺖ ﻭ ﺍﺳﻢ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﻳﺎﺩ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﻢ ‪.‬‬

‫‪tall -‬‬ ‫‪big‬‬ ‫ﺑﺰﺭﮒ‬ ‫‪size‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ‬

‫‪long‬‬ ‫ﺩﺭﺍﺯ‬ ‫‪length‬‬ ‫ﺩﺭﺍﺯﺍ‬

‫‪wide‬‬ ‫ﭘﻬﻦ‬ ‫‪width‬‬ ‫ﭘﻬﻨﺎ‬

‫‪deep‬‬ ‫ﻋﻤﻴﻖ‬ ‫‪depth‬‬ ‫ﻋﻤﻖ‬

‫‪old‬‬ ‫ﻣﺴﻦ – ﭘﻴﺮ‬ ‫‪age‬‬ ‫ﺳﻦ‬

‫‪high‬‬ ‫ﻣﺮﺗﻔﻊ – ﺑﻠﻨﺪ‬ ‫‪height‬‬ ‫ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ‬

‫‪117‬‬
 ‫‪adverb‬‬ ‫ﻗﻴﺪ‬

‫ﻗﻴﺪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻭ ﭼﮕﻮﻧﮕﻲ ﻓﻌﻞ ﺭﺍ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﻣﻲ ﺩﻫﺪ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ‪ ly‬ﺑﻪ ﺁﺧﺮ ﺩﺳﺘﻪ ﺍﻱ ﺍﺯ ﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺑﻪ ﻗﻴـﺪ ﻣـﻲ‬

‫ﻼ‪:‬‬
‫ﻛﻨﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﻣﺜ ﹰ‬

‫‪sincere‬‬ ‫ﻣﺨﻠﺺ‬ ‫‪sincerely‬‬ ‫ﻣﺨﻠﺼﺎﻧﻪ‬

‫‪quick‬‬ ‫ﺳﺮﻳﻊ‬ ‫‪quickly‬‬ ‫ﺑﻪ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ‬

‫‪careful‬‬ ‫ﺩﻗﻴﻖ‬ ‫‪carefully‬‬ ‫ﺑﺎ ﺩﻗﺖ‬

‫ﺍﻳﻨﮕﻮﻧﻪ ﻗﻴﺪﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻣﻲ ﮔﻮﻳﻨﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺟﺎﻳﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺭ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﻓﻌﻞ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻴﻜﻪ ﻣﻔﻌﻮﻝ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺑﻌﺪ‬

‫ﻼ‪:‬‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﻣﻔﻌﻮﻝ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﻣﺜ ﹰ‬

‫‪Hellen speak slowly .‬‬

‫‪Hellen apeaks English slowly .‬‬

‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﻓﻌﻞ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﻫﻨﺪﻩ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺩﺭ ﭼﻨﺎﻥ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺍﻱ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﻗﻴﺪ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺑﺮﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫ﻣﺜﻼً ‪:‬‬

‫‪He left the room quickly .‬‬

‫ﭼﻨﺪ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺯﻳﺮ ‪ ly‬ﻧﻤﻲ ﭘﺬﻳﺮﻧﺪ ﻭ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ‪ ly‬ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺭﻭﻧﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪Fast‬‬ ‫‪Hard‬‬ ‫‪Short‬‬ ‫‪Long‬‬

‫‪Little‬‬ ‫‪Much‬‬ ‫‪Late‬‬ ‫‪Early‬‬
‫‪Near‬‬ ‫‪Far‬‬ ‫‪Still‬‬ ‫‪Just‬‬
‫‪Enough‬‬ ‫‪Straight‬‬ ‫‪Soon‬‬ ‫‪Low‬‬

‫‪118‬‬
 ‫‪a nap‬‬ ‫ﭼﺮﺕ ﺯﺩﻥ‬

‫‪a shower‬‬ ‫ﺩﻭﺵ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ‬

‫‪a test-exam‬‬ ‫ﺍﻣﺘﺤﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻦ‬

‫‪Take‬‬ ‫‪a bath‬‬ ‫ﺣﻤﺎﻡ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ‬

‫‪a dictation‬‬ ‫ﺩﻳﻜﺘﻪ ﻧﻮﺷﺘﻦ‬

‫‪a trip‬‬ ‫ﺳﻔﺮ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ‬

‫‪a vehicle‬‬ ‫ﺳﻮﺍﺭ ﻭﺳﻴﻠﻪﺍﻱ ﺷﺪﻥ‬

‫ﺗﻤﺮﻳﻦ ﺟﻤﻼﺕ ﻓﺎﺭﺳﻲ ‪:‬‬

‫ﺟﻤﻼﺕ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻧﮕﻠﻴﺴﯽ ﺗﺮﺟﻤﻪ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪ -1‬ﻫﻠﻦ ﻣﺜﻞ ﭘﺪﺭﺵ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻬﺮﺑﺎﻧﻲ ﺭﻓﺘﺎﺭ ﻧﻤﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ ‪.‬‬

‫‪Hellen doesn’t behave the same kind as her father .‬‬

‫‪ -2‬ﻣﻦ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺴﺘﻢ ﺗﻤﺮﻳﻨﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﺣﺘﻲ ﺗﻮ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺑﺪﻫﻢ‪.‬‬

‫‪ -3‬ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﺝ ﺑﻪ ﻳﻚ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﺑﻪ ﺧﻮﺑﻲ ﻣﺎﻝ ﺗﻮ ﺩﺍﺭﻧﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪ -4‬ﺍﻭ ﺳﺮﻳﻌﺘﺮ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻨﺸﻲ ﻣﺎ ﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺎﻳﭗ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪He types the letters faster than my secretery.‬‬

‫‪119‬‬
 ‫‪ -5‬ﻣﻦ ﻫﻴﭽﮕﺎﻩ ﺩﻳﺮﺗﺮ ﺍﺯ ﻭﺍﻟﺪﻳﻨﻢ ﺑﻴﺪﺍﺭ ﻧﻤﻲ ﺷﻮﻡ‪.‬‬

‫‪I never get up later than my parents .‬‬

‫‪ -6‬ﺍﻭ ﻧﺘﻮﺍﻧﺴﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺭﻭﺍﻧﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺩﺭ ﺁﻥ ﺍﻣﺘﺤﺎﻥ ﺻﺤﺒﺖ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪ -7‬ﻓﻜﺮ ﻧﻤﻲ ﻛﻨﻢ ﺁﻗﺎﻱ ﺑﺮﺍﻭﻥ ﺟﺪﻱ ﺗﺮ ﺍﺯ ﻫﻤﻜﺎﺭﺵ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻮ ﺻﺤﺒﺖ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬

‫‪ -8‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻛﻮﺗﺎﻩ ﺗﺮﻳﻦ ﮔﻴﺎﻫﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺭﻭﻳﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪ -9‬ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺮﺗﻔﻊ ﺗﺮﻳﻦ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻛﺸﻮﺭ ﺯﻧﺪﮔﻲ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻨﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪ -10‬ﺍﻭ ﺻﻤﻴﻤﺎﻧﻪ ﺗﺮ ﺍﺯ ﻭﺍﻟﺪﻳﻨﺶ ﺑﺎ ﺩﻳﮕﺮﺍﻥ ﺭﻓﺘﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬

‫ﻛﻠﻤﺎﺕ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺑﺎﻻ ﺑﺎ ﺷﻜﻞ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﻱ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺻﻔﺖ ﻧﻴﺰ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺭﻭﻧﺪ ‪ .‬ﻃﺒﻌﹰﺎ ﻭﻗﺘﻲ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺳـﻢ ﺑﺎﺷـﺪ ﻳـﺎ ﺑـﻪ‬

‫ﺗﻨﻬﺎﻳﻲ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﻓﻌﻞ ﺭﺑﻄﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ ﺻﻔﺖ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ‪:‬‬

‫‪Hellen is a fast typist.‬‬

‫‪Hellen is fast.‬‬
‫ﻼ‪:‬‬
‫ﺍﻣﺎ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﻫﺮ ﻓﻌﻞ ﺩﻳﮕﺮﻱ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺭﺑﻂ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺭﻭﺩ ﻗﻴﺪ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﻣﺜ ﹰ‬

‫‪Hellen types fast.‬‬

‫ﻗﻴﺪ‬

‫‪Hellen looks fast.‬‬

‫ﺻﻔﺖ ﻓﻌﻞ ﺭﺑﻂ‬

‫ﭼﻨﺪ ﻛﻠﻤﻪ ﺯﻳﺮ ‪ ly‬ﺩﺍﺭﻧﺪ ﺍﻣﺎ ﻗﻴﺪ ﻧﻴﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﺑﻠﻜﻪ ﺻﻔﺖ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ ‪:‬‬

‫‪friendly‬‬ ‫ﺻﻤﻴﻤﻲ‬ ‫‪lovely‬‬ ‫ﺩﻭﺳﺖ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻨﻲ‬

‫‪deadly‬‬ ‫ﻣﺮﮔﺒﺎﺭ‬ ‫‪kingly‬‬ ‫ﺷﺎﻫﺎﻧﻪ‬

‫‪likely‬‬ ‫ﺍﺣﺘﻤﺎﻟﻲ‬ ‫‪worldy‬‬ ‫ﺟﻬﺎﻧﻲ‬

‫‪motherly‬‬ ‫ﻣﺎﺩﺭﺍﻧﻪ‬ ‫‪fatherly‬‬ ‫ﭘﺪﺭﺍﻧﻪ‬

‫‪sily‬‬ ‫ﺍﺣﻤﻘﺎﻧﻪ‬ ‫‪ugly‬‬ ‫ﺯﺷﺖ‬

‫‪sisterly‬‬ ‫ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺮﺍﻧﻪ‬

‫‪Hellen is a friendly girl.‬‬

‫‪120‬‬
‫ﺗﺬﮐﺮ ‪ :‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﻻﺯﻡ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺍﺯ ﻛﻠﻤﺎﺕ ﺑﺎﻻ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺷﻮﺩ ﭼﻮﻥ ﻧﻤﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺁﻧﻬـﺎ ‪ ly‬ﺍﺿـﺎﻓﻪ ﻛـﺮﺩ ﻭ ﻣـﺜ ﹰ‬
‫ﻼ‬

‫ﮔﻔﺖ ‪ friendlyLY‬ﻧﺎﮔﺰﻳﺮ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﻬﻴﻪ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺍﺯ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫‪Fashion‬‬
‫………… ‪In a/ an +‬‬ ‫‪Way‬‬ ‫ﺭﺍﻩ ﻭ ﺭﻭﺵ‬

‫‪Manner‬‬

‫ﻫﻠﻦ ﺻﻤﻴﻤﺎﻧﻪ ﺻﺤﺒﺖ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪Hellen speaks in a friendly manner.‬‬

‫ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﻣﻘﺎﻳﺴﻪ ﻗﻴﺪ ‪ :‬ﻗﻴﺪ ﻧﻴﺰ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻈﺮ ﻣﻘﺎﻳﺴﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻱ ﺳﻪ ﺩﺭﺟﻪ ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ﻭ ﺑﺮﺗﺮ ﻭ ﺑﺮﺗﺮﻳﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺪﻳﻦ ﺷﺮﺡ ‪:‬‬

‫‪ -1‬ﻗﻴﺪ ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ‪ :‬ﺩﻭ ﻓﻌﻞ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻘﺎﻳﺴﻪ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ ﻭ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ﻣﻌﺮﻓﻲ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ ﻣﺜ ﹰ‬
‫ﻼ ﻫﻠﻦ ﺑﻪ ﻛﻨﺪﻱ ﺳـﻮﺯﺍﻥ ﺗﺎﻳـﭗ ﻣـﻲ‬

‫ﻛﻨﺪ ‪.‬‬

‫ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻤﺎﻥ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﺭﺟﻪ ﺍﺯ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺑﺪﻳﻦ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬

‫‪as‬‬ ‫ﻗﻴﺪ‬ ‫‪as‬‬

‫‪not as/not so‬‬ ‫ﻗﻴﺪ‬ ‫‪as‬‬

‫‪Hellen types as slowly as Susan.‬‬

‫‪Hellen doesn’t type so/as slowly as Susan.‬‬

‫ﻼ‪:‬‬
‫‪ -2‬ﻗﻴﺪ ﺑﺮﺗﺮ ‪ :‬ﺩﻭ ﻓﻌﻞ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻘﺎﻳﺴﻪ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ ﺍﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻲ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻬﺘﺮ ﻳﺎ ﺑﺪﺗﺮ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻨﺎﺳﺪ ﻣﺜ ﹰ‬

‫ﻫﻠﻦ ﻛﻨﺪﺗﺮ ﺍﺯ ﺳﻮﺯﺍﻥ ﺗﺎﻳﭗ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪121‬‬
‫ﺑﻴﺎﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﻢ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺖ ﺑﺮﺗﺮ ﺑﺤﺚ ﻳﻚ ﺑﺨﺸﻲ ﻭ ﺩﻭ ﺑﺨﺸﻲ ﻭ ﭼﻨﺪ ﺑﺨﺸﻲ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻴﻢ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﻴﻜﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺑﺮﺗﺮ ﺍﻳﻨﻄﻮﺭ‬

‫ﻧﻴﺴﺖ‪ .‬ﺑﻠﻜﻪ ﻗﺎﻋﺪﻩ ﺑﺮ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺍﮔﺮ ‪ ly‬ﻣﻲ ﭘﺬﻳﺮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﺭﺟﻪ ‪ more than‬ﺑﻪ ﺁﻥ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻭ ﺍﮔﺮ ‪ly‬‬

‫ﻧﻤﻲ ﭘﺬﻳﺮﺩ ﺑﻪ ﺁﺧﺮﺵ ‪ er‬ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺑﺪﻳﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ‪:‬‬

‫‪Hellen drives more slowly than Susan.‬‬

‫‪Hellen drives faster than Susan.‬‬

‫‪ -3‬ﻗﻴﺪ ﺑﺮﺗﺮﻳﻦ ) ﻋﺎﻟﻲ ( ‪ :‬ﭼﻨﺪ ﻓﻌﻞ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻘﺎﻳﺴﻪ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ ﻭ ﺍﺯ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﻳﻜﻲ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﻬﺘـﺮﻳﻦ ﻳـﺎ ﺑـﺪﺗﺮﻳﻦ ﻣـﻲ‬

‫ﻼ ﻫﻠﻦ ﺑﻪ ﻛﻨﺪﺗﺮﻳﻦ ﻭﺟﻪ ﺗﺎﻳﭗ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬

‫ﺷﻨﺎﺳﺪ‪ .‬ﻣﺜ ﹰ‬

‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﺮﺟﻤﻪ "ﺗﺮﻳﻦ" ﻧﻴﺰ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﺭﺟﻪ ﺍﺯﻗﻴﺪ ﻗﺎﻋﺪﻩ ﺍﻳﻨﺴﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺍﮔﺮ ﻗﻴﺪ ‪ ly‬ﻣﻲ ﭘﺬﻳﺮﺩ ﻗﺒﻠﺶ ‪ the most‬ﻭ ﺍﮔﺮ ‪ly‬‬

‫ﻧﻤﻲ ﭘﺬﻳﺮﺩ ﺑﻪ ﺁﺧﺮﺵ ‪ the est‬ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﻴﻢ‪ ،‬ﺑﺪﻳﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ‪:‬‬

‫‪Hellen types the most slowly.‬‬

‫‪Hellen types the fastest.‬‬
‫ﭼﻮﻥ ﺩﺭ ﺗﺮﺟﻤﻪ ﻗﻴﺪ ﻋﺎﻟﻲ ﺑﻪ ﻓﺎﺭﺳﻲ ﺫﻛﺮ ﻛﻠﻤﻪ “ﺗﺮﻳﻦ” ﻛﺎﻓﻲ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ ﻧﺎﮔﺰﻳﺮ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﺮﺟﻤﻪ ﻗﻴﺪ ﻋـﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﻧﮕﻠﻴﺴـﻲ ﺑـﻪ‬

‫ﻓﺎﺭﺳﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ‪:‬‬

‫} ﻭﺟﻪ ‪ /‬ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ‪ /‬ﺷﻜﻞ {‬ ‫ﺗﺮﻳﻦ‬ ‫ﺑﻪ ‪...........‬‬

‫‪122‬‬
 ‫ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ ‪intensifiers :‬‬ ‫ﻛﻠﻤﺎﺗﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﻫﻨﺪﻩ ﻛﻤﻴﺖ ﻭ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ‬

‫ﻛﻠﻤﺎﺗﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺩﻻﻟﺖ ﺑﺮ ﻛﻤﻴﺖ ﻭ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺯﻳﺎﺩ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻨﺪ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺗﻨﺪ ﺍﺯ ‪ much, many‬ﮐﻪ ﻫﺮﺩﻭ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻌﻨﯽ ﺯﻳـﺎﺩ – ﺧﻴﻠـﯽ‬

‫ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪.‬‬

‫ﺍﺳﻢ ﻣﻔﺮﺩ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﺵ ‪much +‬‬

‫ﺍﺳﻢ ﺟﻤﻊ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﺵ ‪many +‬‬

‫ﻓﺮﻕ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﻭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ‪ much‬ﺍﺳﻢ ﻣﻔﺮﺩ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﺵ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺍﻣﺎ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ‪ many‬ﺍﺳـﻢ‬

‫ﺟﻤﻊ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﺵ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺭﻭﺩ‪.‬‬

‫‪ much‬ﻭ ‪ many‬ﻣﻌﻤﻮ ﹰﻻ ﺩﺭ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺳﺆﺍﻟﻲ ﻭ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﻨﻔﻲ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺭﻭﺩ‬

‫?‪Has Hellen written many letters‬‬

‫?‪Does Hellen drink much coffee‬‬
‫‪Helen has not written many letters.‬‬
‫‪Hellen doesn’t drink much coffee.‬‬

‫ﺩﺭ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﺜﺒﺖ ﻣﻌﻤﻮ ﹰﻻ ﺍﺯ ‪ a lot of‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷـﻮﺩ ﭼـﻪ ﺑـﺮﺍﻱ ﻗﺎﺑـﻞ ﺷـﻤﺎﺭﺵ ﻭ ﭼـﻪ ﺑـﺮﺍﻱ ﻏﻴـﺮ ﻗﺎﺑـﻞ‬

‫ﺷﻤﺎﺭﺵ‪ ،‬ﺑﺪﻳﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ‪:‬‬

‫‪Hellen has written a lot of letters.‬‬

‫‪Hellen drinks a lot of coffee.‬‬

‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺑﺨﻮﺍﻫﻴﻢ ﺷﺪﺕ ﻗﻴﺪ ﻳﺎ ﺻﻔﺖ ﺭﺍ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﻫﻴﻢ ﺍﺯ ‪ too‬ﻳﺎ ‪ very‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ ‪.‬‬

‫‪Too‬‬
‫ﺯﻳﺎﺩ – ﺧﻴﻠﯽ‬ ‫ﺻﻔﺖ ‪ /‬ﻗﻴﺪ ‪+‬‬
‫‪Very‬‬

‫‪123‬‬
 ‫ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﻫﻨﺪﻩ ﺣﺪ ﻣﺘﻌﺎﺩﻝ ﻗﻴﺪ ﻳﺎ ﺻﻔﺖ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻣﺜ ﹰ‬very ‫ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ‬: too & very ‫ﻓﺮﻕ‬
:‫ﻼ‬

The park is very beautiful.

The teacher speaks very fluently.
: ‫ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﻫﻨﺪﻩ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﻧﺎﻣﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﻗﻴﺪ ﻳﺎ ﺻﻔﺖ ﺍﺳﺖ‬too ‫ﺍﻣﺎ‬

It is too cold today.

That driver drives too slowly.

‫ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺭﻭﻧﺪ ﻣﺜ ﹰ‬many ‫ ﻭ‬much ‫ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻨﺪ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﻘﻮﻳﺖ ﻣﻌﻨﻲ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ‬too, very
:‫ﻼ‬

There were too many cars in the street.

Hellen drinks too much water in a day.
She knows very many words.
Thank you very much.

.‫ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﻗﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺻﻔﺖ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺭﻭﺩ‬very , too ‫ ﺑﺮﻋﻜﺲ‬، ‫ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻌﻨﻲ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﻛﺎﻓﻲ‬enough ‫ﻛﻠﻤﻪ‬

‫ ﻗﻴﺪ‬/ ‫ ﺻﻔﺖ‬+ enough

You are rich enough .

He speaks fluently enough .

‫ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﻢ ﻧﻴﺰ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺭﻭﺩ ﻛﻪ ﺍﻟﺒﺘﻪ ﻣﻌﻤﻮ ﹰﻻ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺭﻭﺩ ﻣﺜ ﹰ‬enough ‫ﺍﻟﺒﺘﻪ‬
:‫ﻼ‬

They spend enough money in a month .

: ‫ﻛﻠﻤﺎﺗﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﻫﻨﺪﻩ ﻛﻤﻴﺖ ﻭ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﻛﻢ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺗﻨﺪ ﺍﺯ‬

Little ‫ﻣﻔﺮﺩ – ﺍﺳﻢ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﺵ‬

‫ﻛﻢ ﻭ ﺍﻧﺪﻙ‬
‫ﺟﻤﻊ – ﺍﺳﻢ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﺵ‬
Few

124
 ‫‪ : few & little‬ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﻫﻨﺪﻩ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﻛﻤﻴﺘﻲ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺁﻧﻘﺪﺭ ﻧﺎﭼﻴﺰﻧﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺮ ﻭ ﻫﻴﭻ ﻧﺰﺩﻳﻜﺘﺮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪I have little money in my pocket.‬‬

‫‪He knows few words.‬‬

‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﻻﺯﻡ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﻳﺎ ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩﻱ ﻛﻪ ﭼﺸﻤﮕﻴﺮﺗﺮ ﺍﺯ ‪ few‬ﻭ ‪ little‬ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ ﻧﺎﻡ ﺑﺒﺮﻳﻢ ﻗﺒـﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻧﻬـﺎ ﺣـﺮﻑ ﺗﻌﺮﻳـﻒ )‪(a‬‬

‫ﺑﻜﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺮﻳﻢ‪.‬‬

‫‪a little‬‬ ‫ﻣﻔﺮﺩ – ﺍﺳﻢ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﺵ‬

‫ﻳﮏ ﻛﻤﻲ‬
‫ﺟﻤﻊ – ﺍﺳﻢ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﺵ‬
‫‪a few‬‬

‫‪I drink a little coffee after dinner.‬‬

‫‪He has a few books in his book case.‬‬

‫ﺩﺭ ﻧﻤﻮﺩﺍﺭ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻛﻠﻤﺎﺗﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﻫﻨﺪﺓ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﻭ ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﻭ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺑﻜﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺭﻭﺩ ﺑﻜﺎﺭ ﺭﻓﺘﻪ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬

‫‪all‬‬
‫‪plenty of – a great deal of – a lot of‬‬ ‫‪a lot of – a large number of – plenty of‬‬

‫‪most‬‬ ‫‪most‬‬

‫‪much‬‬ ‫‪many‬‬

‫‪some‬‬ ‫ﻏﻴﺮ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﺵ‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﺵ‬ ‫‪some‬‬

‫‪-------‬‬ ‫‪several‬‬

‫‪a little‬‬ ‫‪a few‬‬

‫‪little‬‬ ‫‪few‬‬

‫‪no‬‬

‫‪125‬‬
‫ﻛﻠﻤﺎﺕ ﺑﺎﻻ ﻣﺎﺩﺍﻡ ﻛﻪ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺑﻜﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺭﻭﻧﺪ ﺻﻔﺖ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﺍﻣﺎ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮﻱ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﻻﺯﻡ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺍﺳـﻢ ﺑﻌـﺪ ﺍﺯ‬

‫ﻼ‪:‬‬
‫ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ ﻧﻘﺶ ﺿﻤﻴﺮ ﭘﻴﺪﺍ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﻣﺜ ﹰ‬

‫‪She Spends little money and I spend much.‬‬

‫ﺻﻔﺖ‬ ‫ﺿﻤﻴﺮ‬

‫‪126‬‬
 ‫‪Such‬‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﻛﻠﻤﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻌﻨﻲ ﭼﻨﻴﻦ ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﻤﻬﺎﻱ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﺵ ﺟﻤﻊ ﻭ ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ ﻏﻴﺮﻗﺎﺑـﻞ ﺷـﻤﺎﺭﺵ ﻣﻔـﺮﺩ ﺑـﺪﻳﻦ ﺻـﻮﺭﺕ‪:‬‬

‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﮐﻪ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﺵ ﺟﻤﻊ ﻣﻔﻬﻮﻡ ﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ‪.‬‬

‫‪Helen hasn't said such words.‬‬

‫‪Helen doesn't like such weather.‬‬

‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺍﺳﻢ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﺵ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻣﻔﺮﺩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺍﺯ ‪ Such a/an‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺑﺪﻳﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ‪:‬‬

‫‪Such a child can't stay quiet.‬‬

‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺩﺭ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻫﺎﺋﻲ ﻛﻪ ‪ Such‬ﺑﻜﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺭﻭﺩ ﺻﻔﺘﻲ ﻧﻴﺰ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺳﻢ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺍﻟﮕﻮﻱ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ‪:‬‬

‫ﺻﻔﺖ ‪Such a/an +‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﻢ ‪+‬‬

‫‪I haven’t seen such an interesting film so far.‬‬

‫ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺟﺎﻱ ‪ Such‬ﺍﺯ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ‪ so‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﻫﻤﺎﻥ ﻣﻌﻨﻲ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﺮﺩ ﺍﻣﺎ ﺍﻟﮕﻮﻱ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺑﺪﻳﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺑﻮﺩ‪:‬‬

‫ﺻﻔﺖ ‪So +‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﻢ ‪+ a an +‬‬

‫‪I haven't seen so interesting a film so far.‬‬

‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺳﻤﻲ ﻳﻚ ﺻﻔﺖ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﻢ ﻛﻪ ﺁﻥ ﺻﻔﺖ ﺭﺍ ‪ Very‬ﺷﺪﺕ ﺑﺨﺸﻴﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷـﺪ ﺟـﺎﻱ ﺣـﺮﻑ ﺗﻌﺮﻳـﻒ ﺑـﺪﻳﻦ‬

‫ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬

‫ﺻﻔﺖ ‪a + Very +‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﻢ ‪+‬‬

‫‪127‬‬
 ‫ﺗﻤﺮﻳﻦ ﺟﻤﻼﺕ ﻓﺎﺭﺳﻲ ‪:‬‬

‫ﺟﻤﻼﺕ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻧﮕﻠﻴﺴﯽ ﺗﺮﺟﻤﻪ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪1‬ـ ﺍﻭ ﮔﻔﺖ ﻛﻪ ﻫﺮﮔﺰ ﭼﻨﻴﻦ ﻏﺬﺍﻱ ﺧﻮﺷﻤﺰﻩ ﺍﻱ ﻧﺨﻮﺭﺩﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬

‫‪2‬ـ ﻭﻗﺘﻲ ﺭﺳﻴﺪﻡ ﺁﻧﺠﺎ‪ ،‬ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺮﻫﺎﻱ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﻱ ﺗﻮﻱ ﺳﺎﻟﻦ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻨﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪3‬ـ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺯﻳﺒﺎﺗﺮﻳﻦ ﭘﺮﻧﺪﻩ ﺍﻱ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﻪ ﺯﻧﺪﮔﻲ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪4‬ـ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﻗﺼﺪ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻨﺪ ﻟﻐﺘﻬﺎﻱ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﻱ ﺣﻔﻆ ﻛﻨﻨﺪ ﺍﻣﺎ ﻧﺘﻮﺍﻧﺴﺘﻨﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪5‬ـ ﻓﻜﺮ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻢ ﭼﺎﻱ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﻱ ﺗﻮﻱ ﻗﻮﺭﻱ ﻧﺒﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪6‬ـ ﭼﻨﺪ ﺗﻦ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻭﺳﺘﺎﻧﻢ ﻣﻲ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻨﺪ ﻳﻚ ﻫﺪﻳﺔ ﺧﻴﻠﻲ ﺍﺭﺯﺷﻤﻨﺪ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﭘﺪﺭ ﻋﻠﻲ ﺑﺒﺮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪7‬ـ ﺍﻭ ﺑﻬﺘﺮﻳﻦ ﺩﻛﺘﺮ ﺁﻥ ﺑﻴﻤﺎﺭﺳﺘﺎﻥ ﻛﻮﭼﻚ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬

‫‪8‬ـ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﻳﻚ ﺟﺎﺩﺓ ﺧﻴﻠﻲ ﻃﻮﻻﻧﻲ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻳﻚ ﻫﻔﺘﻪ ﺭﻛﺎﺏ ﺯﺩﻧﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪9‬ـ ﺍﻭ ﻋﺼﺒﺎﻧﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﻦ ﻣﺮﺩﻱ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻦ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻴﺎﻥ ﺍﻗﻮﺍﻡ ﺳﺮﺍﻍ ﺩﺍﺭﻡ‪.‬‬

‫‪10‬ـ ﺍﻭ ﻋﺎﺩﺕ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﺻﺒﺤﻬﺎ ﻛﻤﻲ ﻗﻬﻮﻩ ﺑﺎ ﺻﺒﺤﺎﻧﻪ ﺍﺵ ﺑﻨﻮﺷﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪128‬‬
 enough ‫ و‬too ‫ﺑﺎ‬ ‫ﮔﺴﺘﺮﺵ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ‬

.‫ ﺑﻜﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺭﻭﻧﺪ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﮔﺴﺘﺮﺵ ﭘﻴﺪﺍ ﻛﻨﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻳﻜﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻬﺎﻱ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺁﻳﺪ‬enough ‫ ﻳﺎ‬too ‫ﺩﺭ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ‬

.‫ ﺍﮔﺮ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺑﺤﺚ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺷﺨﺺ ﻳﺎ ﭼﻴﺰ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﻱ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻳﻜﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻬﺎﻱ ﺯﻳﺮ ﮔﺴﺘﺮﺵ ﻣﻲ ﻳﺎﺑﺪ‬:1

too + ‫ ﻗﻴﺪ‬/‫ ﺻﻔﺖ‬+ to ‫ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺑﺎ‬

She is too young to work.

She drives too slowly to arrive on time.

‫ ﺻﻔﺖ‬/‫ ﻗﻴﺪ‬+ enough + to ‫ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺑﺎ‬

1.She is rich enough to buy the house.

2.They work hard enough to earn a lot of money.

.‫ ﺍﮔﺮ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺑﺤﺚ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺩﻭﺷﺨﺺ ﻳﺎ ﺩﻭ ﭼﻴﺰ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﮔﺴﺘﺮﺵ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻳﻜﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻬﺎﻱ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺑﻮﺩ‬:2

too + ‫ ﻗﻴﺪ‬/‫ ﺻﻔﺖ‬+ for ‫ ﺷﺨﺺ‬+ to ‫ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺑﺎ‬

1.The car is too expensive for me to buy.

2.You speak too fast for me to under stand.

‫ ﻗﻴﺪ‬/‫ ﺻﻔﺖ‬+ enough + for ‫ ﺷﺨﺺ‬+ to ‫ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺑﺎ‬

1.The book is easy enough for us to read.

2.You sigh beautifully enough for them to enjoy.

129
 ‫»‪«Other‬‬ ‫»ﺩﻳﮕﺮ«‬

‫ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ‪ other‬ﺑﻪ ﻣﻌﻨﻲ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺳﺎﻣﻲ ﺟﻤﻊ ﻧﺎﻣﻌﻴﻦ ﺑﻜﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺭﻭﺩ ﻣﺜ ﹰ‬
‫ﻼ‪:‬‬

‫‪John has polished other shoes too.‬‬

‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻣﻔﺮﺩ ﻭ ﻧﺎﻣﻌﻴﻦ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ ‪ another‬ﺑﻜﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺭﻭﺩ‪ .‬ﻣﺜ ﹰ‬
‫ﻼ‪:‬‬

‫‪This child wants another toy.‬‬

‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻣﻌﻴﻦ )ﭼﻪ ﻣﻔﺮﺩ ﻭ ﭼﻪ ﺟﻤﻊ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ ‪ the other‬ﺑﻜﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺭﻭﺩ ﻛﻪ ﺍﺷﺎﺭﻩ ﺑـﻪ ﺍﺳـﻢ ﺩﻭﻡ ﻳـﺎ‬

‫ﻼ‪:‬‬
‫ﮔﺮﻭﻩ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﻣﺜ ﹰ‬

‫‪I don't like this hat. I like the other hat.‬‬

‫‪I don't like these shoes but I like the other shoes.‬‬
‫ﻛﻠﻤﺎﺗﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺗﺎﻛﻨﻮﻥ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺑﺤﺚ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﺮﻓﺖ ﻫﻤﮕﻲ ﺻﻔﺖ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﻭ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺑﻜﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺭﻭﻧﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪another +‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﻢ ﻣﻔﺮﺩ ﻧﺎﻣﻌﻴﻦ‬

‫ﺍﺳﻢ ﺟﻤﻊ ﻧﺎﻣﻌﻴﻦ ‪Other+‬‬ ‫‪Ö‬‬ ‫‪the other‬‬ ‫‪+‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﻢ ﻣﻔﺮﺩ ﻣﻌﻴﻦ‬

‫‪the other‬‬ ‫‪+‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﻢ ﺟﻤﻊ ﻣﻌﻴﻦ‬

‫ﺣﺘﻲ ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﺳﻤﻬﺎﻱ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺿﻤﻴﺮ ‪ one‬ﻳﺎ ‪ ones‬ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻛﺮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫‪another one‬‬
‫‪other ones‬‬ ‫‪the other one‬‬
‫‪the other ones‬‬

‫ﺣﺘﻲ ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﺳﻤﻬﺎﻱ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ‪ another‬ﻭ ‪) the other‬ﻣﻔﺮﺩ( ﺭﺍ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻛﺮﺩ ﻭ ﺍﺯ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺿﻤﻴﺮ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ‬

‫ﻛﺮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫‪I don't like this hat, I like the other. Hat.‬‬

‫‪This child wants another hat.‬‬

‫‪130‬‬
‫ﺍﻣﺎ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺍﺳﻤﻬﺎﻱ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ‪ other‬ﻭ ‪) the other‬ﺟﻤﻊ( ﺭﺍ ﺑﺨﻮﺍﻫﻴﻢ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ ﻧﻤﻴﺘﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﺯ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻛﻠﻤﺎﺕ ﺑـﻪ ﻋﻨـﻮﺍﻥ‬

‫ﺿﻤﻴﺮ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﺮﺩ ﺑﻠﻜﻪ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺿﻤﻴﺮ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺮﻑ )‪ (S‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ‪.‬‬

‫ﺩﻳﮕﺮﺍﻥ ـ ﺑﻘﻴﻪ → ‪others‬‬

‫)ﺍﻭﻥ ﻳﻜﻲ ﻫﺎ( ﺁﻥ ﺩﻳﮕﺮﺍﻥ → ‪The others‬‬

‫‪I don't like these shoes. I Like the others.‬‬

‫‪John has polished others too.‬‬

‫ﺩﺭ ﺩﻭ ﺍﺻﻄﻼﺡ ﺯﻳﺮ ‪ other‬ﻭ ‪ another‬ﺑﻜﺎﺭ ﺭﻓﺘﻪ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﻛﺎﺭﺑﺮﺩ ﻣﺨﺼﻮﺻﻲ ﺩﺍﺭﻧﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪each other‬‬ ‫ﺑﻴﻦ ﺩﻭﻛﺲ‬

‫ﻫﻤﺪﻳﮕﺮ ‪ -‬ﻳﻜﺪﻳﮕﺮ‬
‫‪one another‬‬ ‫ﺑﻴﻦ ﺑﻴﺶ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻭﻛﺲ‬

‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﻭ ﺍﺻﻄﻼﺡ ﻭﻗﺘﻲ ﺑﻜﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺭﻭﺩ ﻛﻪ ﻛﺎﺭﻱ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻣﺘﻘﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻭ ﻃﺮﻑ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬

‫ﻼ ﺑﺠﺎﻱ ﺍﻳﻨﻜﻪ ﮔﻔﺘﻪ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻣﻦ ﺍﺣﻤﺪ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻨﺎﺳﻢ ﻭ ﺍﺣﻤﺪ ﻣﺮﺍ ﻣـﻲ ﺷﻨﺎﺳـﺪ ﺑﻬﺘـﺮ ﺍﺳـﺖ ﮔﻔﺘـﻪ ﺷـﻮﺩ‪ :‬ﺍﺣﻤـﺪ ﻭ ﻣـﻦ‬
‫ﻣﺜ ﹰ‬

‫ﻫﻤﺪﻳﮕﺮ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻨﺎﺳﻴﻢ‪.‬‬

‫‪Ahmad and I know each other.‬‬

‫‪People must help one another.‬‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﻛﺎﺭﻱ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻣﺘﻘﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻧﻴﺎﻓﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺑﻠﻜﻪ ﺍﺯ ﻳﻚ ﺳﻮ ﻭ ﻳﻚ ﺟﻬـﺖ ﺭﺥ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺑﺎﺷـﺪ ﺍﺯ ﻛﻠﻤـﺔ ‪ together‬ﺑـﻪ‬

‫ﻣﻌﻨﻲ )ﺑﺎ ﻳﻜﺪﻳﮕﺮ ـ ﺑﺎ ﻫﻤﺪﻳﮕﺮ( ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻭ ﺁﻧﺮﺍ ﻧﺒﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﺎ ﻓﻌﻞ ‪ to gather‬ﺑﻪ ﻣﻌﻨﻲ ﺟﻤـﻊ ﺁﻭﺭﻱ ﻛـﺮﺩﻥ ﺍﺷـﺘﺒﺎﻩ‬

‫ﻛﺮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫‪Helen and jane study together.‬‬

‫ﺩﺭ ﭼﻨﺪ ﺍﺻﻄﻼﺡ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ‪ other‬ﻣﻌﻨﻲ »ﺩﻳﮕﺮ« ﻧﻤﻴﺪﻫﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪every other days = on alternate days‬‬ ‫ﻳﻜﺮﻭﺯ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻴﺎﻥ‬

‫‪the other day = some days ago‬‬ ‫ﭼﻨﺪ ﺭﻭﺯ ﻗﺒﻞ‬

‫‪other wise = or else‬‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻻـ ﻭﮔﺮﻧﻪ‬

‫‪on the other hand = in other words‬‬ ‫ﺍﺯ ﻃﺮﻑ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ‬

‫‪131‬‬
‫‪other than = except‬‬ ‫ﺑﻪ ﺟﺰ‬

‫‪one after another = one by one‬‬

‫ﺗﻤﺮﻳﻦ ﺟﻤﻼﺕ ﻓﺎﺭﺳﻲ ‪:‬‬

‫ﺟﻤﻼﺕ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻧﮕﻠﻴﺴﯽ ﺗﺮﺟﻤﻪ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪1‬ـ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﹰﺎ ﻫﺮ ﺭﻭﺯ ﻫﻤﺪﻳﮕﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻮﻱ ﺟﻠﺴﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺑﻴﻨﻨﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪2‬ـ ﻣﻦ ﻭ ﺩﻭﺳﺘﻢ ﻳﻜﺮﻭﺯ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻴﺎﻥ ﻫﻤﺪﻳﮕﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻛﻼﺱ ﻣﻼﻗﺎﺕ ﻣﻴﻜﻨﻴﻢ‪.‬‬

‫‪3‬ـ ﻭﻗﺘﻲ ﺭﺳﻴﺪﻳﻢ ﺁﻧﺠﺎ ﻭﺍﻟﺪﻳﻨﻢ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻨﺪ ﺑﺎ ﻳﻜﺪﻳﮕﺮ ﻣﻲ ﺭﻓﺘﻨﺪ ﺧﺮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪4‬ـ ﺳﻪ ﺗﺎ ﻛﺘﺎﺏ ﺭﻭﻱ ﻣﻴﺰ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺷﺖ ـ ﻳﻜﻲ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺩﺍﺷﺘﻢ ﻭ ﺁﻥ ﺩﻳﮕﺮﻱ ﺭﺍ ﺟﺎ ﮔﺬﺍﺷﺘﻢ‪.‬‬

‫‪5‬ـ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭﻱ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺤﺼﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻨﺪ ﺗﻮﻱ ﺣﻴﺎﻁ ﺑﺎﺯﻱ ﻣﻲ ﻛﺮﺩﻧﺪ‪ ،‬ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩﻱ ﻫﻢ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻨﺪ ﺩﺭﺳﻬﺎﻳﺸﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺣﻔﻆ ﻣﻲ ﻛﺮﺩﻧﺪ ﻭ ﺁﻥ‬

‫ﺑﻘﻴﻪ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻨﺪ ﻛﻼﺱ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺰﺋﻴﻦ ﻣﻲ ﻛﺮﺩﻧﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪6‬ـ ﻓﻜﺮ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻢ ﺍﻭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺷﻠﻮﺍﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺩﻭﺳﺖ ﻧﺪﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻟﻄﻔﹰﺎ ﺁﻥ ﺩﻳﮕﺮﻱ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻭ ﺑﺪﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪7‬ـ ﻣﺮﺩﻱ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﺩﺭ ﻛﻼﺱ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﺩﺭﺱ ﻣﻲ ﺩﻫﺪ ﺳﺎﺑﻘﹰﺎ ﻣﻌﻠﻢ ﻣﺎ ﺑﻮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫‪8‬ـ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻨﻈﻮﺭﻡ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻫﺎ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ ﺑﻠﻜﻪ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬

‫‪9‬ـ ﺁﻳﺎ ﺟﺎﻥ ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍﻧﻨﺪﺓ ﺩﻳﮕﺮﻱ ﺍﺗﻮﺑﻮﺱ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻧﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪10‬ـ ﻣﺎ ﺳﺎﺑﻘﹰﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺁﻥ ﺍﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺩﻳﮕﺮﻱ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺧﺪﻣﺘﻜﺎﺭ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﻛﺮﺩﻳﻢ‪.‬‬

‫‪132‬‬
 ‫ﺗﻤﺮﻳﻦ ﺟﻤﻼﺕ ﻓﺎﺭﺳﻲ ‪:‬‬

‫ﺟﻤﻼﺕ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻧﮕﻠﻴﺴﯽ ﺗﺮﺟﻤﻪ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪1‬ـ ﻣﺮﺩﻱ ﻛﻪ ﺳﺎﺑﻘﹰﺎ ﺍﻳﻨﺠﺎ ﺯﻧﺪﮔﻲ ﻣﻲ ﻛﺮﺩ ﺍﻻﻥ ﺩﺭ ﺁﻥ ﺧﺎﻧﻪ ﺩﻳﮕﺮﻱ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬

‫‪2‬ـ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺍﻱ ﻛﻪ ﺗﻮ ﻧﻮﺷﺘﻲ ﺑﻪ ﻗﺸﻨﮕﻲ ﺁﻥ ﺩﻳﮕﺮﻱ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ‪.‬‬

‫‪3‬ـ ﺧﺎﻧﻪ ﺍﻱ ﻛﻪ ﻣﺎ ﺗﻮﻱ ﺁﻥ ﺯﻧﺪﮔﻲ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻗﻴﻤﺖ ﻧﻤﻲ ﺍﺭﺯﺩ‪.‬‬

‫‪4‬ـ ﺷﻴﺸﻪ ﺍﻱ ﺭﺍ ﻛﻪ ﺁﻥ ﺑﭽﻪ ﺷﻜﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻮﺩ ﻣﺎﻝ ﺍﺗﺎﻕ ﭘﺬﻳﺮﺍﻳﻲ ﻣﺎ ﺑﻮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫‪5‬ـ ﻣﻦ ﺁﺩﺭﺳﻲ ﺭﺍ ﻛﻪ ﺗﻮ ﻧﻮﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﻮﺩﻱ ﮔﻢ ﻛﺮﺩﻡ‪.‬‬

‫‪6‬ـ ﻣﺮﺩﻱ ﺭﺍ ﻛﻪ ﺗﻮ ﺩﺭﺑﺎﺭﺓ ﺁﻥ ﺻﺤﺒﺖ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻲ ﭘﺪﺭﻡ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻨﺎﺳﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪7‬ـ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻪ ﺑﭽﻪ ﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺁﻗﺎﻱ ﺍﺳﻤﻴﺖ ﺩﺭﺱ ﻣﻲ ﺩﻫﺪ ﮔﻔﺘﻢ ﻛﻪ ﺍﻭ ﺍﻣﺮﻭﺯ ﻧﺨﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺁﻣﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪8‬ـ ﻗﻠﻤﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺗﻮ ﺧﺮﻳﺪﻩ ﺍﻱ ﺑﻪ ﮔﺮﺍﻧﻲ ﻣﺎﻝ ﻣﻦ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ‪.‬‬

‫‪9‬ـ ﻣﻬﻤﺎﻧﻬﺎ ﻳﻜﻲ ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻳﮕﺮﻱ ﺟﺸﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺮﻙ ﻛﺮﺩﻧﺪ ﻭ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻴﺰﺑﺎﻥ ﺗﺸﻜﺮ ﻛﺮﺩﻧﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪10‬ـ ﺁﻧﻬﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﻧﺪ ﺗﻮﻱ ﺣﻴﺎﻁ ﺑﺎﺯﻱ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻨﺪ ﺷﺎﮔﺮﺩﻫﺎﻱ ﺁﻗﺎﻱ ﺍﺳﻤﻴﺖ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪11‬ـ ﭘﻴﺮﺍﻫﻨﻲ ﺭﺍ ﻛﻪ ﺗﻮﻱ ﭼﻤﺪﺍﻥ ﺑﻮﺩ ﺧﻴﻠﻲ ﺩﻭﺳﺖ ﺩﺍﺭﻡ‪.‬‬

‫‪12‬ـ ﺍﻭ ﻛﻔﺸﻬﺎﻳﻲ ﺭﺍ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻦ ﺑﺮﺍﻳﺶ ﺧﺮﻳﺪﻩ ﺑﻮﺩﻡ ﻫﺮﮔﺰ ﻧﭙﻮﺷﻴﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪13‬ـ ﺗﻮﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ﭘﻮﻝ ﺩﺭ ﺟﻴﺒﺖ ﻧﺪﺍﺭﻱ ﻧﻤﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﻲ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻛﺘﺎﺏ ﮔﺮﺍﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺨﺮﻱ‪.‬‬

‫‪14‬ـ ﭘﺴﺮﻱ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺍﺷﺖ ﺑﺎ ﺁﻗﺎﻱ ﺍﺳﻤﻴﺖ ﺻﺤﺒﺖ ﻣﻲ ﻛﺮﺩ ﺳﺎﺑﻘﹰﺎ ﻛﺎﺭﮔﺮ ﻣﺎ ﺑﻮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫‪15‬ـ ﻣﻦ ﺍﺗﺎﻗﻲ ﺭﺍ ﻛﻪ ﺗﻮ ﺗﻤﻴﺰ ﻛﺮﺩﻱ ﻗﺼﺪ ﺩﺍﺭﻡ ﺩﻭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﺗﻤﻴﺰ ﻛﻨﻢ‪.‬‬

‫‪133‬‬
 ‫ﺗﻤﺮﻳﻦ ﺟﻤﻼﺕ ﻓﺎﺭﺳﻲ ‪:‬‬

‫ﺟﻤﻼﺕ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻧﮕﻠﻴﺴﯽ ﺗﺮﺟﻤﻪ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪1‬ـ ﺁﻳﺎ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺑﺰﺭﮔﺘﺮﻳﻦ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻤﺎﻥ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﻪ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ‪.‬‬

‫?‪Isn’t this the largest building in this area‬‬

‫‪2‬ـ ﺍﻭ ﺯﻳﺒﺎﺗﺮﻳﻦ ﮔﻞ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺑﺎﻏﭽﻪ ﺭﺍ ﭼﻴﺪﻩ ﺑﻮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫‪He had picked the most beautiful flower from this garden.‬‬
‫‪3‬ـ ﻫﻠﻦ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﺓ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺮﺵ ﺑﺎﻫﻮﺵ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ‪.‬‬

‫‪Helen isn't so/as intelligent as her sister.‬‬

‫‪4‬ـ ﺍﻭ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﺳﺖ ﮔﺮﺍﻧﺘﺮﻳﻦ ﻫﺪﻳﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﭘﺪﺭﺵ ﺑﺒﺮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫‪He is supposed to take the most expensive present for his father.‬‬

‫‪5‬ـ ﺁﻗﺎﻱ ﺍﺳﻤﻴﺖ ﺳﺮﻳﻌﺘﺮﻳﻦ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﻧﻮﻳﺲ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺩﺍﺭﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬

‫‪Mr. Smith is the fastest typist in this office.‬‬

‫‪6‬ـ ﺧﺎﻧﺔ ﻣﺎ ﮔﺮﺍﻧﺘﺮ ﺍﺯ ﺧﺎﻧﻪ ﺍﻱ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺗﻮ ﺧﺮﻳﺪﻩ ﺍﻱ‪.‬‬

‫‪Our house is more expensive than the house that you have bought.‬‬
‫‪7‬ـ ﺍﻭ ﺩﺭ ﻛﻮﭼﻜﺘﺮﻳﻦ ﺧﺎﻧﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺧﻴﺎﺑﺎﻥ ﺳﺎﺑﻘﹰﺎ ﺯﻧﺪﮔﻲ ﻣﻲ ﻛﺮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫‪He used to live in the smallest house in this street.‬‬

‫‪8‬ـ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺴﺘﻢ ﺩﺭﺍﺯﺗﺮﻳﻦ ﺟﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻛﺸﻮﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ‪ 24‬ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﺭﺍﻧﻨﺪﮔﻲ ﻛﻨﻢ‪.‬‬

‫‪I could drive the longest road in this country for 24 hours.‬‬
‫‪9‬ـ ﻓﻜﺮ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻢ ﻛﻔﺸﻬﺎﻱ ﺗﻮ ﺍﺭﺯﺍﻧﺘﺮ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺎﻝ ﻣﻦ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪134‬‬
I think, your shoes are cheaper than mine
.‫ـ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺯﻳﺒﺎﺗﺮﻳﻦ ﻫﺪﻳﻪ ﺍﻱ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻦ ﺧﺮﻳﺪﻩ ﺍﻡ‬10

This is the most interesting present that I have bought.

135
 ‫ﻣﻮﺻﻮﻟﻲ ‪Relative Pronouns‬‬ ‫ﺿﻤﺎﻳﺮ‬

‫ﻼ ﮔﻔﺘﻴﻢ ﻛﻪ ﺻﻔﺖ ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻛﻠﻤﻪ ﺑﻜﺎﺭ ﺭﻭﺩ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺑﻜﺎﺭ ﺭﻭﺩ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﻌـﺪ ﺍﺯ ﻓﻌﻠﻬـﺎﻱ‬
‫ﻗﺒ ﹰ‬

‫‪ Link‬ﻳﺎ ﺭﺑﻂ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ‪ .‬ﺻﻔﺖ ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺳﻢ‪ ،‬ﺷﻜﻞ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻛﻪ ﭼﻮﻥ ﭼﻨﺎﻥ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺍﻱ ﺣﺎﻟـﺖ ﻭﺻـﻔﻲ‬

‫ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﺑﻪ ﺁﻥ ﺟﻤﻠﺔ ﻭﺻﻔﻲ ﮔﻮﻳﻨﺪ ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ﺟﻤﻠﺔ ﻭﺻﻔﻲ ﺍﻳﻨﺴﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎ »ﻛﻪ« ﻣﻮﺻﻮﻟﻲ ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫ﺟﻤﻠﺔ ﻭﺻﻔﻲ ‪) +‬ﻛﻪ( ﻣﻮﺻﻮﻟﻲ ‪ +‬ﺍﺳﻢ‬

‫ﭘﺲ »ﻛﻪ« ﻣﻮﺻﻮﻟﻲ ﺟﻤﻠﺔ ﻭﺻﻔﻲ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺍﺳﻢ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺧﻮﺩﺵ ﻭﺻﻞ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ؛ ﺑﻪ ﻫﻤﻴﻦ ﻋﻠﺖ ﻣﻮﺻﻮﻟﻲ ﻧﺎﻡ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪ .‬ﺧﺎﺻـﻴﺖ‬

‫ﺩﻳﮕﺮ »ﻛﻪ« ﻣﻮﺻﻮﻟﻲ ﺍﻳﻨﺴﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﺳﻢ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺧﻮﺩﺵ ﺩﺭ ﺟﻤﻠﺔ ﻭﺻﻔﻲ ﺑﻪ ﻫﺮ ﻧﺤﻮ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮﻱ ﻣـﻲ ﻛﻨـﺪ‪.‬‬

‫ﺍﻳﻨﻜﻪ ﮔﻔﺘﻴﻢ ﺑﻬﺮ ﻧﺤﻮ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺭﻭﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻓﺎﺭﺳﻲ ﻫﻤﺔ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﻳﻌﻨﻲ »ﻛﻪ« ﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﻮﺻﻮﻟﻲ )ﻙ ـ ﻩ( ﺍﻣﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻧﮕﻠﻴﺴـﻲ‬

‫ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺍﺳﻤﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻗﺒﻠﺸﺎﻥ ﺑﻜﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺭﻭﺩ ﺷﻜﻠﻬﺎﻱ ﻣﺘﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﺩﺍﺭﻧﺪ ﺑﺪﻳﻦ ﺷﺮﺡ‪.‬‬

‫‪1‬ـ »ﻛﻪ« ﻣﻮﺻﻮﻟﻲ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﺳﻢ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﺩﺭ ﻓﺎﻋﻞ ﺟﻤﻠﺔ ﻭﺻﻔﻲ ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮﻱ ﻛﻨﺪ ‪ who‬ﺗﺮﺟﻤﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫‪The man.‬‬ ‫‪The man works here.‬‬

‫‪…the man who works here.‬‬
‫‪2‬ـ »ﻛﻪ« ﻣﻮﺻﻮﻟﻲ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﺳﻢ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻔﻌﻮﻝ ﺟﻤﻠﺔ ﻭﺻﻔﻲ ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮﻱ ﻛﻨﺪ ‪ whom‬ﺗﺮﺟﻤﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫‪The man‬‬ ‫‪I know the man.‬‬

‫‪…the man whom I know.‬‬

‫‪3‬ـ »ﻛﻪ« ﻣﻮﺻﻮﻟﻲ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﺳﻢ ﻏﻴﺮﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﺩﺭ ﻓﺎﻋﻞ ﺟﻤﻠﺔ ﻭﺻﻔﻲ ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮﻱ ﻛﻨﺪ ‪ which‬ﺗﺮﺟﻤﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫‪The bus‬‬ ‫‪The bus stops here everyday.‬‬

‫‪…the bus which stops here everyday.‬‬

‫‪4‬ـ »ﻛﻪ« ﻣﻮﺻﻮﻟﻲ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﺳﻢ ﻏﻴﺮﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻔﻌﻮﻝ ﺟﻤﻠﺔ ﻭﺻﻔﻲ ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮﻱ ﻛﻨﺪ ‪ which‬ﺗﺮﺟﻤﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫‪The book‬‬ ‫‪I study the book.‬‬

‫‪…the book which I study.‬‬
‫‪5‬ـ »ﻛﻪ« ﻣﻮﺻﻮﻟﻲ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﺳﻢ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺩﺭ ﺟﻤﻠﺔ ﻭﺻﻔﻲ ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮﻱ ﻛﻨﺪ ﺑﻪ ‪ where‬ﺗﺮﺟﻤﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫‪The house.‬‬ ‫‪they live in it.‬‬

‫‪the house where they live ( in ).‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺩﺍﻧﺴﺖ ﻛﻪ ﻭﻗﺘﻴﻜﻪ ﺍﺯ ‪ where‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻧﻴﺎﺯ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺮﻑ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ‪.‬‬

‫‪136‬‬
 ‫‪6‬ـ »ﻛﻪ« ﻣﻮﺻﻮﻟﻲ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺩﺭ ﺟﻤﻠﺔ ﻭﺻﻔﻲ ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮﻱ ﻛﻨﺪ ﺑﻪ ‪ when‬ﺗﺮﺟﻤﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫‪The year.‬‬ ‫‪I was born in the year.‬‬

‫‪The year when I was born.‬‬
‫‪7‬ـ »ﻛﻪ« ﻣﻮﺻﻮﻟﻲ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﺻﻔﺖ ﻣﻠﻜﻲ ﺩﺭ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮﻱ ﻛﻨﺪ ﺗﺮﺟﻤﺔ ﺁﻥ ‪ whose‬ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬

‫‪The man‬‬ ‫‪his wife works with me.‬‬

‫‪…The man whose wife works with me.‬‬
‫‪…The dog whose name was Top‬‬ ‫ﻳﺎ‬ ‫‪the dog the name of which was top of.‬‬

‫‪ of which‬ﺍﺳـﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛـﺮﺩ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﺘﻪ ﺍﮔﺮ ﻗﺒﻞ ‪ whose‬ﺍﺳﻢ ﻏﻴﺮﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﺠـﺎﻱ ‪ whose‬ﺍﺯ‬

‫ﺑﺪﻳﻦ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﻛﻪ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ‪ whose‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ‪ whose‬ﻣﻨﺘﻘﻞ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ ﻭ ﺑﺠﺎﻱ ‪ whose‬ﺍﺯ ‪ of which‬ﺍﺳـﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ‬

‫ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ‪.‬‬

‫…‪The room whose door‬‬

‫…‪The room the door of which‬‬
‫‪8‬ـ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺩﺭ ﺟﻤﻠﺔ ﻭﺻﻔﻲ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺻﻔﺖ ﻣﻠﻜﻲ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺁﻥ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺑﻪ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ‪ whose‬ﻣﻨﺘﻘﻞ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫‪9‬ـ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ‪ which‬ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺕ ‪ The thing‬ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺑﺠـﺎﻱ ﺗﺮﻛﻴـﺐ ‪ The thing which‬ﺍﺯ‬

‫‪ what‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ‪ .‬ﺑﺪﻳﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ‪:‬‬

‫‪The thing which you need is fresh air.‬‬

‫‪What you need is fresh air.‬‬
‫‪10‬ـ »ﻛﻪ« ﻣﻮﺻﻮﻟﻲ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﻭ ﻋﻠﺖ ﺩﺭ ﺟﻤﻠﺔ ﻭﺻﻔﻲ ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮﻱ ﻛﻨﺪ ﺑﻪ ‪ why‬ﺗﺮﺟﻤﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫‪The reason.‬‬ ‫‪I study English for that reason.‬‬

‫‪The reason why I study English is that I want to go abroad.‬‬
‫ﺗﺬﮐﺮ ﻣﻬﻢ‪ :‬ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺩﺍﻧﺴﺖ ﻛﻪ ﻭﻗﺘﻲ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ‪ The reason why‬ﺩﺭ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺑﻜﺎﺭ ﺭﻓﺘﻪ ﺍﺩﺍﻣﻪ ﭘﻴﺪﺍ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨـﺪ ﺍﺯ ﻛﻠﻤـﺔ‬

‫ﺭﺑﻂ ‪ That‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻧﻪ ‪. because‬‬

‫‪137‬‬
‫ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻥ ﺩﺭ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﺍﺳﻢ‪ ،‬ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ »ﻛﻪ« ﻣﻮﺻﻮﻟﻲ ﺿﻤﻴﺮ ﺑﻜﺎﺭ ﺑﺮﺩ ﻭ ﺑﺎ »ﻛﻪ« ﻣﻮﺻـﻮﻟﻲ )‪ ،(who‬ﻫﻤـﺔ ﺿـﻤﻴﺮﻫﺎ ﺑﻜـﺎﺭ ﻣـﻲ‬

‫ﺭﻭﻧﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﺯ ‪ They‬ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺟﺎﻱ ﺁﻥ ﺍﺯ ‪ Those‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻣﺜ ﹰ‬

‫ﻼ‪:‬‬

‫‪I who work hard.‬‬ ‫‪we who work hard‬‬

‫‪You who work hard.‬‬ ‫‪you who work hard‬‬
‫‪It who works hard.‬‬
‫‪She who works hard.‬‬ ‫‪Those who work hard.‬‬
‫‪He who works hard.‬‬

‫‪ .1‬ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺟﺎﻳﮕﺰﻳﻨﻲ ﺿﻤﺎﻳﺮ ﻣﻮﺻﻮﻟﻲ‬

‫ﺍﺯ ﺑﻴﻦ »ﻛﻪ« ﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﻮﺻﻮﻟﻲ‪ 3 ،‬ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ‪ whom ، who‬ﻭ ‪) which‬ﻓﺎﻋﻠﻲ ﻭ ﻣﻔﻌﻮﻟﻲ( ﻗﺎﺑـﻞ ﺟـﺎﻳﮕﺰﻳﻦ ﺷـﺪﻥ ﺑـﺎ ‪that‬‬

‫ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﺑﺪﻳﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ‪:‬‬

‫‪The man who works here is my uncle.‬‬

‫‪that‬‬

‫‪The man whom you saw yesterday wants you.‬‬

‫‪that‬‬

‫‪The house which is on the corner is mine.‬‬

‫‪that‬‬

‫‪The house which you bought is too expensive.‬‬

‫‪that‬‬

‫‪ .2‬ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺣﺬﻑ »ﻛﻪ« ﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﻮﺻﻮﻟﻲ‬

‫ﺍﺯ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺿﻤﺎﻳﺮ ﻣﻮﺻﻮﻟﻲ ﺣﺘﻲ ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻥ ‪ whom‬ﻭ ‪) which‬ﻣﻔﻌﻮﻟﻲ( ﺭﺍ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻛﺮﺩ ﺑﺪﻳﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ‬

‫‪The man which you saw yesterday wants you.‬‬

‫‪The house which you bought is too expensive.‬‬

‫‪ .3‬ﺟﻤﻼﺕ ﻭﺻﻔﻲ ﺿﺮﻭﺭﻱ ﻭ ﻏﻴﺮﺿﺮﻭﺭﻱ‬

‫ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻭﺻﻔﻲ ﺍﻧﮕﻠﻴﺴﻲ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻭ ﺩﺳﺘﻪ ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻢ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪1‬ـ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻭﺻﻔﻲ ﺿﺮﻭﺭﻱ )‪ (necessary‬ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ )‪ (defining‬ﻫﻢ ﻣﻲ ﮔﻮﻳﻨﺪ‪.‬‬

‫ﻼ ﺩﺭ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺍﻱ ﻣﺜﻞ‪:‬‬
‫ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻭﺟﻮﺩﺷﺎﻥ ﺿﺮﻭﺭﻱ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺗﺎ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺩﺭ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﻣﺜ ﹰ‬

‫‪a writer is a person.‬‬

‫‪138‬‬
‫ﺷﻨﻮﻧﺪﻩ ﻭ ﺧﻮﺍﻧﻨﺪﻩ ﻣﻨﺘﻈﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ ﭼﻴﺰﻱ ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺑﻪ ‪ Person‬ﺑﻔﻬﻤﺪ ﺯﻳﺮﺍ ﻣﻔﻬﻮﻡ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ ﻫﺮ ﺟﻤﻠـﺔ ﻭﺻـﻔﻲ‬

‫ﻼ‪:‬‬
‫ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺑﻜﺎﺭ ﺭﻭﺩ ﺿﺮﻭﺭﻱ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ﻣﻲ ﺁﻳﺪ ﻣﺜ ﹰ‬

‫‪a writer is a person who writes novel.‬‬

‫‪2‬ـ ﺟﻤﻼﺕ ﻭﺻﻔﻲ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺿﺮﻭﺭﻱ )‪ (unnecessary‬ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ‪ none defining‬ﮔﻮﻳﻨﺪ‪.‬‬

‫ﺟﻤﻼﺗﻲ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻭﺟﻮﺩﺷﺎﻥ ﺻﺪﺩﺭﺻﺪ ﺿﺮﻭﺭﻱ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ ﺑﻠﻜﻪ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻲ ﺩﺭ ﻣـﻮﺭﺩ ﺍﺳـﻢ ﺑﻜـﺎﺭ‬

‫ﻼ ﺩﺭ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺍﻱ ﻣﺜﻞ‪:‬‬
‫ﻣﻲ ﺭﻭﺩ ﻣﺜ ﹰ‬

‫‪Hafez is a great poet.‬‬

‫ﭼﻮﻥ ﻣﻔﻬﻮﻡ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻫﺮ ﻭﺻﻔﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺣـﺎﻓﻆ ﺑﻴـﺎﻥ ﺷـﻮﺩ ﺻﺪﺩﺭﺻـﺪ ﺿـﺮﻭﺭﻱ ﻧﻴﺴـﺖ ﻭ ﺑـﻪ ﺁﻥ‬

‫ﻼ‪:‬‬
‫)‪ (unnecessary‬ﮔﻮﻳﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﻣﺜ ﹰ‬

‫‪Hafez who lives in Shiraz, is a great poet.‬‬

‫ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ﺟﻤﻼﺕ ﻭﺻﻔﻲ )‪ (unnecessary‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﻛﺎﻣﺎ )‪ (،‬ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺭﻭﻧـﺪ ﻭ ﺍﺳـﻢ ﻗﺒﻠﺸـﺎﻥ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺳـﺎﻣﻲ‬

‫ﺧﺎﺹ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬

‫ﻧﻜﺘﺔ ﻣﻬﻢ‪ :‬ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺟـﺎﻳﮕﺰﻳﻨﻲ ﻭ ﺣـﺬﻑ ﺩﺭ ﺟﻤﻠـﻪ ﻫـﺎﻱ ‪ none defining‬ﺑﻜـﺎﺭ ﻧﻤـﻲ ﺭﻭﻧـﺪ ﻭﻟـﻲ ﺩﺭ ﺟﻤﻠـﻪ ﻫـﺎﻱ‬

‫‪ defining‬ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻣﻲ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫ﺗﻤﺮﻳﻦ ﺟﻤﻼﺕ ﻓﺎﺭﺳﻲ ‪:‬‬

‫ﺟﻤﻼﺕ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻧﮕﻠﻴﺴﯽ ﺗﺮﺟﻤﻪ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪1‬ـ ﻣﺮﺩﻱ ﻛﻪ ﺗﻮﻱ ﺍﺗﺎﻕ ﺩﻳﮕﺮﻱ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﺩﺭﺱ ﻣﻲ ﺩﻫﺪ ﺳﺎﺑﻘﹰﺎ ﻣﻌﻠﻢ ﻣﺎ ﺑﻮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫‪139‬‬
 ‫‪2‬ـ ﺁﻧﻬﺎﺋﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺯﻭﺩ ﺑﻴﺪﺍﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ﻫﻤﻴﺸﻪ ﻣﻮﻓﻖ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪3‬ـ ﻣﻨﻲ ﻛﻪ ﭘﻮﻝ ﺗﻮﻱ ﺟﻴﺐ ﻧﺪﺍﺭﻡ ﻧﻤﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﻢ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﺮﺩ ﻓﻘﻴﺮ ﻛﻤﻚ ﻛﻨﻢ‪.‬‬

‫‪4‬ـ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻲ ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻳﮕﺮﻱ ﺻﻒ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺮﻙ ﻛﺮﺩﻳﻢ ﺯﻳﺮﺍ ﻧﺎﻧﻮﺍﺋﻲ ﻧﺎﻥ ﻧﺪﺍﺷﺖ‪.‬‬

‫‪5‬ـ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻳﻨﻜﻪ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻮ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻧﺰﺩﻡ ﺍﻳﻨﺴﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻣﺎ ﺧﺮﺍﺏ ﺑﻮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫‪6‬ـ ﺧﺎﻧﻪ ﺍﻱ ﻛﻪ ﺁﻥ ﻃﺮﻑ ﺧﻴﺎﺑﺎﻥ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﺳﺎﺑﻘﹰﺎ ﻣﺘﻌﻠﻖ ﺑﻪ ﺁﻗﺎﻱ ﺑﺮﺍﻭﻥ ﺑﻮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫‪7‬ـ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺮﺩﻱ ﺭﺍ ﻛﻪ ﺗﻮ ﺩﺍﺭﻱ ﺩﺭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﺍﺵ ﺻﺤﺒﺖ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻲ ﻧﺪﻳﺪﻡ‪.‬‬

‫‪8‬ـ ﻓﻜﺮ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻢ ﺗﻮ ﺁﻥ ﺳﻴﺐ ﺭﺍ ﺩﻭﺳﺖ ﻧﺪﺍﺭﻱ‪ .‬ﺑﻨﺎﺑﺮﺍﻳﻦ ﺁﻥ ﺩﻳﮕﺮﻱ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺩﺍﺭ‪.‬‬

‫‪9‬ـ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﻫﺮ ﺭﻭﺯ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺆﺳﺴﻪ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﺑﺠﺰ ﺭﻭﺯﻫﺎﻱ ﻓﺮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫‪10‬ـ ﺧﺎﻧﻪ ﺍﻱ ﻛﻪ ﺁﻗﺎﻱ ﺑﺮﺍﻭﻥ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺨﺮﺩ ﮔﺮﺍﻧﺘﺮ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ ﻳﻜﻲ ﺩﻳﮕﺮﻱ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬

‫‪140‬‬
 ‫ﺟﻤﻼﺕ ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ﺣﺪﺳﻲ ﻭ ﮔﺬﺷﺘﺔ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻭﺍﻗﻌﻲ‬
‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺤﺚ ﺩﺭﺑﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﻭ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻻﺯﻡ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻣﺮﻭﺭﻱ ﺑﺮ ﻓﻌﻠﻬﺎﻱ ﺍﻧﮕﻠﻴﺴﻲ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﻢ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺟـﺪﻭﻝ ﺯﻳـﺮ ﻧﺸـﺎﻥ‬

‫ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﻧﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪to do‬‬ ‫‪ does-did‬ـ‬

‫‪to have‬‬ ‫‪ has-had‬ـ‬
‫‪to be‬‬ ‫‪ am-is-are-was-were‬ـ‬
‫‪to need‬‬ ‫ـ ـ‬
‫‪can‬‬ ‫‪ Could‬ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺴﺘﻦ‬

‫‪may‬‬ ‫‪ Might‬ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺑﻮﺩﻥ‬

‫‪must‬‬ ‫ـ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ‬

‫‪shall‬‬ ‫‪ Should‬ﻋﻼﺋﻢ ﺁﻳﻨﺪﻩ‬

‫‪will‬‬ ‫‪ Would‬ﻋﻼﺋﻢ ﺁﻳﻨﺪﻩ‬

‫ـ‬ ‫‪ used to‬ﺳﺎﺑﻘﹰﺎ‬

‫ـ‬ ‫‪ ought to‬ﺑﺎﻳﺪ‬

‫ـ‬ ‫‪ to be supposed to‬ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺑﻮﺩﻥ‬

‫ـ‬ ‫‪ had better‬ﺗﺮﺟﻴﺢ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻦ‬

‫ـ‬ ‫‪ would rather‬ـ‬

‫ـ‬ ‫‪ have to‬ﺑﺎﻳﺪ‬

‫ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻓﻌﻠﻬﺎﻱ ﻛﻤﻜﻲ )‪ (can, may, shall, will, must‬ﺭﺍ ﻛﻪ ﺭﻳﺸﺔ ﻣﺼﺪﺭﻱ ﻧﺪﺍﺭﻧﺪ ﻓﻌﻠﻬﺎﻱ ﻛﻤﻜﻲ ﻣﺪﺍﻝ ﮔﻮﻳﻨـﺪ‬

‫)‪.(modal‬‬

‫ﺍﺯ ﻓﻌﻠﻬﺎﻱ ﻣﺪﺍﻝ ﻛﻠﻤﺎﺗﻲ ﺻﺎﺩﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺸﺘﻘﺎﺕ ﮔﻮﻳﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﻛﻪ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺗﻨﺪ ﺍﺯ‪:‬‬

‫‪ would-should-might-could‬ﺣﺎﻝ ﻣﻲ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﻢ ﻓﻌﻠﻬﺎﻱ ﻣﺪﺍﻝ ﻭﻣﺸﺘﻘﺎﺕ ﺁﻧﻬـﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑـﺎ ﺳـﻪ ﻧـﻮﻉ ﻣﺼـﺪﺭ ﺳـﺎﺩﻩ ‪،‬‬

‫ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭﻱ ﻭ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ ﺗﺎ ﺑﺒﻴﻨﻴﻢ ﺟﻤﻠﺔ ﺣﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﭼﻴﺴﺖ‪.‬‬

‫‪141‬‬
‫‪1‬ـ ﺑﺎ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺳﺎﺩﻩ‪ :‬ﻭﻗﺘﻲ ﻓﻌﻠﻬﺎﻱ ﻣﺪﺍﻝ ﻭ ﻣﺸﺘﻘﺎﺕ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺳﺎﺩﻩ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ ﺟﻤﻠﺔ ﺣﺎﺻـﻠﻪ ﺯﻣـﺎﻥ ﺣـﺎﻝ ﻭ ﻳـﺎ‬

‫ﺁﻳﻨﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪) .‬ﺑﻪ ﺷﺮﻁ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺣﺎﻝ ﻭ ﺁﻳﻨﺪﻩ(‬

‫‪Bob can come now. → Bob can come tomorrow.‬‬

‫‪Bob could come now. → Bob could come tomorrow.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﻳﻚ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻣﺸﺘﻘﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﮔﺬﺷﺘﺔ ﻓﻌﻠﻬﺎﻱ ﻣﺪﺍﻝ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ﻣﻲ ﺁﻳﻨﺪ ﻭ ﺁﻥ ﺍﻳﻨﺴﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻳﺎ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ‬

‫ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﺗﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﮔﺬﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪Bob could come yesterday.‬‬

‫‪I knew that Bob could come.‬‬
‫‪2‬ـ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭﻱ‪:‬‬

‫ﺑﺎ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭﻱ ﻭﻗﺘﻲ ‪ Should‬ﺭﺍ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ ﺟﻤﻠﺔ ﺣﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﺣﺎﻝ ـ ﻏﻴﺮﻭﺍﻗﻌﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﻣﺜ ﹰ‬
‫ﻼ‪:‬‬

‫‪Helen should be resting.‬‬ ‫)ﻫﻠﻦ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺧﻮﺍﺏ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻭﻟﻲ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ(‬

‫ﺣﺎﻝ ﻏﻴﺮﻭﺍﻗﻌﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﻈﺮ ﻛﻪ ﺍﮔﺮ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻣﺜﺒﺖ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﻣﻔﻬﻮﻡ ﺁﻥ ﻣﻨﻔﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻻ ﻭ ﺍﮔـﺮ ﻇـﺎﻫﺮ ﺟﻤﻠـﻪ‬

‫ﻼ‪:‬‬
‫ﻣﻨﻔﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﻣﻔﻬﻮﻡ ﺁﻥ ﻣﺜﺒﺖ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻣﺜ ﹰ‬

‫‪Hellen Shouldn’t be resting.‬‬

‫ﺑﺎ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭﻱ ﻭﻗﺘﻲ ‪ may‬ﺭﺍ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ ﺟﻤﻠﺔ ﺣﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺣﺪﺳﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬

‫‪It may be raining.‬‬ ‫ﺷﺎﻳﺪ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺭﺩ‬

‫ﺣﺎﻝ ﺣﺪﺳﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﻈﺮ ﻛﻪ ﺍﺯ ﻗﺮﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎ ﻭ ﺷﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺣﺪﺱ ﻣﻲ ﺯﻧﻴﻢ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﺎﺭﻱ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪3‬ـ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ‪ :‬ﺑﺎ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﻭﻗﺘﻲ ‪ can , must , may‬ﺭﺍ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ ﺟﻤﻠﺔ ﺣﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﮔﺬﺷﺘﺔ ﺣﺪﺳﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻣﺜ ﹰ‬
‫ﻼ‪:‬‬

‫ﻫﻠﻦ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺭﺍ ﺩﻳﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪Hellen must have seen the film. .‬‬

‫ﮔﺬﺷﺘﺔ ﺣﺪﺳﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﻈﺮ ﻛﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺷﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﻭ ﻗﺮﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎ ﺣﺪﺱ ﻣﻲ ﺯﻧﻴﻢ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﺎﺭﻱ ﺩﺭ ﮔﺬﺷـﺘﻪ ﺭﺥ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺑﺎﺷـﺪ‬

‫ﻼ ﺍﺯﺍﻳﻨﻜﻪ ﻫﻠﻦ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺗﻲ ﻣﻲ ﺩﻫﺪ ﺣﺪﺱ ﻣﻲ ﺯﻧﻴﻢ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺭﺍ ﺩﻳﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺜ ﹰ‬

‫‪142‬‬
‫ﺍﻣﺎ ﺑﺎ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﻭﻗﺘـﻲ ‪ might-ought to-should-could-would‬ﺭﺍ ﺗﺮﻛﻴـﺐ ﻛﻨـﻴﻢ ﺟﻤﻠـﺔ ﺣﺎﺻـﻠﻪ ﮔﺬﺷـﺘﺔ‬

‫ﻏﻴﺮﻭﺍﻗﻌﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬

‫‪could ‬‬
‫‪should ‬‬
‫)ﮔﺬﺷﺘﺔ ﻏﻴﺮﻭﺍﻗﻌﻲ( ‪would  + have P.P‬‬
‫‪might ‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪ought to ‬‬

‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‪:‬‬

‫‪I should have gone there.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻣﻲﺭﻓﺘﻢ ﺁﻧﺠﺎ )ﻛﻪ ﻧﺮﻓﺘﻢ(‪.‬‬

‫ﮔﺬﺷﺘﺔ ﻏﻴﺮﻭﺍﻗﻌﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﻈﺮ ﻛﻪ ﺍﮔﺮ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻣﺜﺒﺖ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ‪ not‬ﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ ﻣﻔﻬﻮﻡ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻣﻨﻔﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﺑـﺎﻻ‬

‫ﻭ ﺍﮔﺮ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻣﻨﻔﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ‪ not‬ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻣﻔﻬﻮﻡ ﻣﺜﺒﺖ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺩﺍﺷﺖ ﺑﺪﻳﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ‪:‬‬

‫‪I shouldn’t have gone there.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﻧﺒﺎﻳﺪ ﻣﻲﺭﻓﺘﻢ ﺁﻧﺠﺎ )ﻭﻟﻲ ﺭﻓﺘﻢ(‪.‬‬

‫ﺗﻤﺮﻳﻦ ﺟﻤﻼﺕ ﻓﺎﺭﺳﻲ ‪:‬‬

‫ﺟﻤﻼﺕ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻧﮕﻠﻴﺴﯽ ﺗﺮﺟﻤﻪ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪1‬ـ ﭘﺪﺭﻡ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﭘﻴﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺁﻳﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻨﺶ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺮﻭﺧﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪2‬ـ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺍﻳﻨﺠﺎ ﻧﻴﺴﺘﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺗﻮﻱ ﻛﻤﺪ ﮔﺬﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻤﺸﺎﻥ‪.‬‬

‫‪3‬ـ ﻣﻦ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺧﺎﻧﺔ ﻋﻤﻮﻳﻢ ﺟﺎ ﮔﺬﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻢ‪ .‬ﭼﻮﻥ ﺗﻮﻱ ﺟﻴﺒﻢ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ‪.‬‬

‫‪143‬‬
 ‫‪4‬ـ ﺗﻮ ﻧﺒﺎﻳﺪ ﺟﻠﻮﻱ ﺩﻳﮕﺮﺍﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻭ ﺗﻮﻫﻴﻦ ﻣﻲ ﻛﺮﺩﻱ‪.‬‬

‫‪5‬ـ ﭘﺪﺭﻡ ﻧﺒﺎﻳﺪ ﻣﻲ ﺭﻓﺖ ﭘﻴﺶ ﺩﻛﺘﺮ )ﭼﻮﻥ ﭼﺸﻤﻬﺎﻳﺶ ﺿﻌﻴﻒ ﻧﻴﺴﺘﻨﺪ(‪.‬‬

‫‪6‬ـ ﺗﻮ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﻧﺴﺘﻲ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻣﺘﺤﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻧﻬﺎﺋﻲ ﻗﺒﻮﻝ ﺷﻮﻱ ﻧﻤﻴﺪﻭﻧﻢ ﭼﺮﺍ ﺷﺮﻛﺖ ﻧﻜﺮﺩﻱ‪.‬‬

‫‪7‬ـ ﺍﻭ ﺍﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺷﺖ ﺑﺎ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﺗﺼﺎﺩﻑ ﻛﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺩﺳﺘﺶ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻲ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻲ‪.‬‬

‫‪8‬ـ ﻣﻦ ﻧﺒﺎﻳﺪ ﺩﺭ ﺭﺍ ﻗﻔﻞ ﻣﻲ ﻛﺮﺩﻡ ﭼﻮﻥ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﭘﺪﺭﻡ ﺯﻭﺩﺗﺮ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻴﺎﻳﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪9‬ـ ﺁﻗﺎﻱ ﺑﺮﺍﻭﻥ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺑﺤﺎﻝ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﻔﺎ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪10‬ـ ﻣﻌﻠﻢ ﻧﺒﺎﻳﺪ ﺩﺭﺱ ﺭﺍ ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪144‬‬
 ‫ﺁﻳﻨﺪﺓ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺩﻻﻟﺖ ﺑﺮ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻋﻤﻠﻲ ﻣﻲ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺍﺯ ﻳﻚ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭ ﺍﻣﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺁﻳﻨﺪﻩ ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﻭ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﻲ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ‪.‬‬

‫ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺩﺭ ﻓﺎﺭﺳﻲ‪ :‬ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺗﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻭﻝ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺁﻳﻨﺪﻩ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﺑﺎ ﺟﻤﻼﺕ ﺣﺎﻝ ﻛﺎﻣـﻞ ﻋﻼﻣﺘـﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳـﻦ ﺯﻣـﺎﻥ ﺩﺭ‬

‫ﻓﺎﺭﺳﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬

‫ﺗﺎ ‪ +‬ﻗﻴﺪ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺁﻳﻨﺪﻩ ‪ +‬ﺣﺎﻝ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ← ﺁﻳﻨﺪﺓ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ‬

‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‪ :‬ﺗﺎ ﺳﺎﻝ ﺁﻳﻨﺪﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺑﻴﺮﺳﺘﺎﻥ ﻓﺎﺭﻍ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺼﻴﻞ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﻳﻢ‪.‬‬

‫‪I will have graduated from high school by next year.‬‬

‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‪ :‬ﺭﺿﺎ ﺗﺎ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ‪ 5‬ﺑﺮﮔﺸﺘﻪ ﺧﻮﻧﻪ‪.‬‬

‫‪Reza will have returned home by five o’clock.‬‬

‫ﻃﺮﺯ ﺳﺎﺧﺖ‪ :‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻦ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻧﮕﻠﻴﺴﻲ ﺍﺯ ﻓﺮﻣﻮﻝ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫‪Subject + will have + Past Participle‬‬

‫ﻧﺸﺎﻧﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ‪:‬‬

‫‪1‬ـ ﺗﺎ ‪ +‬ﻗﻴﺪ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺁﻳﻨﺪﻩ ← )‪ (By tomorrow‬ﻗﻴﺪ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺁﻳﻨﺪﻩ ‪By +‬‬

‫‪in ‬‬
‫‪ two weeks‬‬ ‫‪2‬ـ ﺗﺎ ‪ +‬ﻃﻮﻝ ﻣﺪﺕ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ←‬
‫‪within ‬‬

‫‪3‬ـ ﺗﺎ ‪ +‬ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺳﺎﺩﻩ ← ﺁﻳﻨﺪﻩ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ‬

‫ﺗﺎ ‪ +‬ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺣﺎﻝ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ← ﺁﻳﻨﺪﺓ ﺳﺎﺩﻩ‬ ‫‪4‬ـ‬

‫‪by the time‬‬

‫ﺁﻳﻨﺪﻩ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ‬ ‫‪before‬‬ ‫ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺳﺎﺩﻩ ‪+‬‬

‫ﺁﻳﻨﺪﻩ ﺳﺎﺩﻩ‬ ‫‪as soon as‬‬ ‫ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺣﺎﻝ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ‪+‬‬

‫‪when‬‬

‫‪145‬‬
 ‫‪Conditionals‬‬ ‫ﺟﻤﻼﺕ ﺷﺮﻃﻲ‬

‫ﻳﻚ ﺟﻤﻠﺔ ﺷﺮﻃﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻭ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﺗﺸﻜﻴﻞ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻳﻜﻲ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﺷﺮﻁ )‪ (if clause‬ﻭ ﺩﻳﮕﺮﻱ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﺟﻮﺍﺏ ﻳﺎ ﻧﺘﻴﺠـﻪ‬

‫ﻳﺎ ﺟﺰﺍﺀ )‪ (main clause‬ﺑﺪﻳﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ‪:‬‬

‫ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﺟﺰﺍﺀ ﺷﺮﻁ ‪ ،‬ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﺷﺮﻁ ‪if +‬‬

‫ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﺟﻮﺍﺏ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍ ﻭ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﺷﺮﻁ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻴﺎﻥ ﻛﺮﺩ ﻳﺎ ﻧﻮﺷﺖ ﺩﺭ ﺁﻥ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﺝ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ﻛﺎﻣـﺎ )ﻭ(‬

‫ﻭﺳﻂ ﺩﻭ ﺑﻨﺪ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ‪.‬‬

‫ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﺷﺮﻁ ‪ + if +‬ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﺟﺰﺍﺀ‬

‫ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺷﺮﻃﻲ ﺍﻧﮕﻠﻴﺴﻲ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻭ ﺩﺳﺘﺔ ﻭﺍﻗﻌﻲ ﻭﻏﻴﺮﻭﺍﻗﻌﻲ ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻢ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭﺍﻳﻨﺠﺎ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺑﺤﺚ ﻣﺎ ﺟﻤﻼﺕ ﺷﺮﻃﻲ‬

‫ﻏﻴﺮﻭﺍﻗﻌﻲ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ‪.‬‬

‫ﺷﺮﻃﻲ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻏﻴﺮﻭﺍﻗﻌﻲ ﺳﻪ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺩﺍﺭﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﺯﻳﺮﺍ ﻫﺮ ﻳﻚ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﻳﻜﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﻬﺎﻱ ﺁﻳﻨﺪﻩ ـ ﺣﺎﻝ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ﻫﺴـﺘﻨﺪ‬

‫ﺑﺪﻳﻦ ﺷﺮﺡ‪:‬‬

‫‪1‬ـ ﺷﺮﻃﻲ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻭﻝ‪ :‬ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺁﻳﻨﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬

‫ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﺷﺮﻁ‬ ‫ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﺟﺰﺍﺀ‬

‫‪if +‬‬
‫ﺣﺎﻝ ﺳﺎﺩﻩ‬

‫‪If Helen has money, she can buy the car.‬‬

‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﻫﻠﻦ ﭘﻮﻟﻲ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻭ ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﺭﻭ ﺑﺨﺮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫ﭼﻮﻥ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺷﺮﻃﻲ ﺍﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﺑﻪ ﺁﻥ )‪ (Possible‬ﮔﻮﻳﻨﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪146‬‬
 ‫‪2‬ـ ﺷﺮﻃﻲ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺩﻭﻡ‪ :‬ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬

‫ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﺷﺮﻁ‬ ‫ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﺟﺰﺍﺀ‬

‫‪if +‬‬ ‫ﻭ‬
‫ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ﺳﺎﺩﻩ‬ ‫ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺳﺎﺩﻩ ‪ +‬ﻣﺸﺘﻘﺎﺕ‬

‫‪If Helen had money now, she could buy the car.‬‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﻫﻠﻦ ﺍﻻﻥ ﭘﻮﻝ ﺩﺍﺷﺖ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﻧﺴﺖ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺨﺮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫ﭼﻮﻥ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺷﺮﻃﻲ ﮔﻮﻳﻨﺪﻩ ﺗﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻛﺎﺭﻱ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺣﺎﻝ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﭘﻴﺪﺍ ﻧﻤـﻲ ﻛﻨـﺪ ﺑـﻪ ﺍﻳـﻦ ﻧـﻮﻉ‬

‫ﺷﺮﻃﻲ )‪ (imaginary‬ﮔﻮﻳﻨﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪3‬ـ ﺷﺮﻃﻲ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺳﻮﻡ‪ :‬ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬

‫‪if +‬‬
‫ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﺷﺮﻁ‬ ‫ﻭ‬ ‫ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﺟﺰﺍﺀ‬
‫‪have + P.P‬‬ ‫‪ + have + P.P‬ﻣﺸﺘﻘﺎﺕ‬

‫‪If Hellen had had money, she could have bought the book yesterday.‬‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﻫﻠﻦ ﺩﻳﺮﻭﺯ ﭘﻮﻝ ﺩﺍﺷﺖ ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﺴﺖ ﻛﺘﺎﺏ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺨﺮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫ﭼﻮﻥ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺷﺮﻃﻲ ﮔﻮﻳﻨﺪﻩ‪ ،‬ﺷﺮﻃﻲ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻄﺮﺡ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻧﻴﺎﻓﺘﻪ ﻭ ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ﺭﺍ ﻧﻤﻴﺘﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﺎﺯﮔﺮﺩﺍﻧـﺪ‬

‫ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺷﺮﻃﻲ ﻏﻴﺮﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﻳﺎ )‪ (impossible‬ﻳﺎ ﮔﺬﺷﺘﺔ ﻏﻴﺮﻭﺍﻗﻌﻲ ﮔﻮﻳﻨﺪ‪.‬‬

‫ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺷﺮﻃﻲ ﺩﻭﻡ ﻭ ﺳﻮﻡ‬

‫ﻼ‪:‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺷﺮﻃﻲ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺩﻭﻡ ﻭ ﺳﻮﻡ ﻳﺎ ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﺝ ﺑﻪ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻣﺜ ﹰ‬

‫‪1‬ـ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺍﻣﺮﻭﺯ ﭘﻮﻝ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻢ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻛﺘﺎﺏ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻲ ﺧﺮﻳﺪﻡ‪.‬‬

‫‪If I had money today, I would buy this book.‬‬

‫‪2‬ـ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺩﻳﺮﻭﺯ ﭘﻮﻝ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻢ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻛﺘﺎﺏ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻲ ﺧﺮﻳﺪﻡ‪.‬‬

‫‪If I had money yesterday , I would have bought this car.‬‬

‫‪147‬‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺩﺭ ﺟﻤﻠﺔ ﺷﺮﻃﻲ ﺑﻜﺎﺭ ﻧﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺩﻭﻡ ﻭ ﺳـﻮﻡ ﺍﺣﺘﻴـﺎﺝ ﺑـﻪ ﺟﻤﻠـﺔ ﻧﺸـﺎﻧﻪ ﺍﺳـﺖ ﺑـﺪﻳﻦ‬

‫ﻼ‪:‬‬
‫ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻛﻪ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺟﻤﻠﺔ ﻧﺸﺎﻧﻪ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺷﺮﻃﻲ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺩﻭﻡ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻣﺜ ﹰ‬

‫‪she doesn't try if she tried , she would succeed.‬‬

‫ﻼ‪:‬‬
‫ﻭ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺟﻤﻠﺔ ﻧﺸﺎﻧﻪ‪ ،‬ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺷﺮﻃﻲ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺳﻮﻡ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻣﺜ ﹰ‬

‫‪She didn't try, if she had tried , she would have succeeded.‬‬

‫‪148‬‬
 ‫» ﻭﺍﻻ«‬ ‫‪Otherwise‬‬

‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﻛﻠﻤﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻌﻨﻲ ﻭﺍﻻ ﺩﺭ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺷﺮﻃﻲ ﺑﺠﺎﻱ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ‪ if clause‬ﺑﻜﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺭﻭﺩ‪ .‬ﻣﺜ ﹰ‬
‫ﻼ ﺑﻪ ﺟﺎﻱ ﺍﻳﻨﻜﻪ ﮔﻔﺘﻪ ﺷﻮﺩ‪:‬‬

‫ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﻣﺮﺍ ﺩﻋﻮﺕ ﻧﻜﺮﺩﻧﺪ؛ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺩﻋﻮﺕ ﻣﻲ ﻛﺮﺩﻧﺪ ﻣﻲ ﺭﻓﺘﻢ‪.‬‬

‫‪They didn’t invite me, If they had invited me, I would have gone.‬‬
‫ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻥ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺑﺎﻻ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺑﻴﺎﻥ ﻛﺮﺩ ﻛﻪ‪:‬‬

‫ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﻣﺮﺍ ﺩﻋﻮﺕ ﻧﻜﺮﺩﻧﺪ ﻭ ﺍﻻ ﻣﻲ ﺭﻓﺘﻢ‪.‬‬

‫‪They didn’t invite me; other wise, I would have gone.‬‬

‫ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻧﺸﺎﻧﻪ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﺟﺰﺍﻱ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ‪ otherwise‬ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﺷـﺮﻃﻲ ﻧـﻮﻉ ﺳـﻮﻡ ﺍﺳـﺖ‬

‫ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻻ‪.‬‬

‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺟﻤﻠﺔ ﻧﺸﺎﻧﻪ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺟﺰﺍﻱ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﺷﺮﻃﻲ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺩﻭﻡ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺑﺪﻳﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ‪:‬‬

‫‪They don't invite me, other wise, I would go.‬‬

‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻧﺸﺎﻧﻪ ﻓﻌﻞ ﺍﻣﺮ ﻳﺎ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺁﻳﻨﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺟﺰﺍﻱ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ‪ otherwise‬ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﺷﺮﻃﻲ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻭﻝ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻣﺜ ﹰ‬
‫ﻼ‪:‬‬

‫‪Don’t smoke, otherwise, you will get used to it.‬‬

‫‪149‬‬
 ‫ﻛﺎﺷﻜﻲ ـ ﺍﻱ ﻛﺎﺵ‬ ‫» ‪« Wish‬‬

‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ‪ wish‬ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺑﺎ ‪ to‬ﺑﻜﺎﺭ ﺭﻭﺩ ‪ wish‬ﻣﻌﻨﻲ ﻣﻴﻞ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻦ ﻭ ﺧﻮﺍﺳﺘﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬

‫‪I wish to see them.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻲ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻢ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺒﻴﻨﻢ‪.‬‬

‫‪I want to see them.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻲ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻢ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺒﻴﻨﻢ‪.‬‬

‫ﺍﻣﺎ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ‪ wish‬ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺑﻜﺎﺭ ﺭﻭﺩ ﺩﺭ ﺁﻥ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ‪ wish‬ﻣﻔﻬﻮﻡ ﺁﺭﺯﻭ ﭘﻴﺪﺍ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ ﻭ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻌﻨﻲ ﻛﺎﺵ ـ ﻛﺎﺷﻜﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ‬

‫ﻭ ﭼﻮﻥ ﻓﺎﻋﻞ ﺁﺭﺯﻭﻱ ﻛﺎﺭﻱ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﺁﻥ ﻳﺎ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺁﻥ ﺣﺘﻤﻲ ﻭﻳﻘﻴﻨـﻲ ﻧﻴﺴـﺖ ‪ wish‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳـﻦ ﺣﺎﻟـﺖ ﺟـﺰﺀ‬

‫ﻏﻴﺮﻭﺍﻗﻌﻲ ﻫﺎ ﺑﺤﺴﺎﺏ ﻣﻲ ﺁﻳﺪ ﺑﺪﻳﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻛﻪ‪:‬‬

‫‪1‬ـ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺁﺭﺯﻭ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺁﻳﻨﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ‪ wish‬ﺑﺎ ‪ would‬ﺑﻴﺎﻥ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﻣﺜ ﹰ‬
‫ﻼ‪:‬‬

‫‪I wish they would call me tomorrow.‬‬

‫‪2‬ـ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺁﺭﺯﻭ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﻓﻌﻞ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺑﻌﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ‪ wish‬ﺩﺭ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﮔﺬﺷﺘﺔ ﺳﺎﺩﻩ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺑﻮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫‪I wish They called me now.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻱ ﻛﺎﺵ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺍﻻﻥ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻣﻲ ﺯﺩﻧﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪3‬ـ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺁﺭﺯﻭ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻓﻌﻞ ﺟﻤﻠﺔ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ‪ wish‬ﺑﺎ ﮔﺬﺷﺘﺔ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﺑﻴﺎﻥ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻣﺜ ﹰ‬
‫ﻼ‪:‬‬

‫‪I wish They had called me yesterday.‬‬

‫ﻳﺎﺩﺁﻭﺭﻱ ﻣﻬﻢ‪ :‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺩﺭ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻧﺪﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺷﻜﻞ ﻓﻌﻞ ﺟﻤﻠﺔ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ‪ wish‬ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﺝ ﺑﻪ ﺟﻤﻠﺔ‬

‫ﻧﺸﺎﻧﻪ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬

‫‪150‬‬
 ‫ﻛﻠﻤﺎﺕ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻝ‪if‬‬

‫ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻥ ﺩﺭ ﺳﻪ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺷﺮﻃﻲ ﺫﻛﺮ ﺷﺪﺓ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺑﻪ ﺟﺎﻱ ‪ if‬ﺍﺯ ﻳﻜﻲ ﺍﺯ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﺮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫‪on condition‬‬
‫‪‬‬ ‫‪ Suppose‬‬
‫‪  Pr ovided‬ﺑﻪ ﺷﺮﻃﻲ ﻛﻪ‬ ‫‪ ‬ﺑﻪ ﻓﺮﺽ ﺍﻳﻨﻜﻪ‬
‫‪ Pr oviding‬‬ ‫‪Suppo sin g‬‬
‫‪‬‬

‫‪I will sign the contract provided you give me some money.‬‬
‫ﻳﻜﻲ ﺍﺯ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻓﻮﻕ ﻧﻴﺰ ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﻨﺪ ﺩﺭ ﺷﺮﻃﻲ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺩﻭﻡ ﺑﺠﺎﻱ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ‪ if‬ﺑﻜﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺭﻭﺩ‪.‬‬

‫‪Suppose it rained now ، I would stay home.‬‬

‫ﻛﻪ» ‪« It is time‬‬ ‫ﻭﻗﺘﺶ ﺍﺳﺖ‬

‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺕ ﻭﻗﺘﻲ ﺑﻜﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺭﻭﺩ ﻛﻪ ﻓﺎﻋﻠﻲ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻛﺎﺭﻱ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺧﻮﺩ ﻳﺎ ﻛﺲ ﺩﻳﮕـﺮﻱ ﺗـﺮﺟﻴﺢ ﺩﻫـﺪ ﻭ ﻗﺎﻋـﺪﺓ ﺁﻥ‬

‫ﺍﻳﻨﺴﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺍﮔﺮ ﮔﻮﻳﻨﺪﺓ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ‪ ،‬ﺗﺮﺟﻴﺢ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻛﺎﺭﻱ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺧﻮﺩﺵ ﻣﻲ ﺩﻫﺪ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺕ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺑﺎ ‪ to‬ﺑﻜـﺎﺭ ﻣـﻲ‬

‫ﺑﺮﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺪﻳﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ‪:‬‬

‫ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺑﺎ ‪it’s time + to‬‬

‫‪it’s time to finish the job.‬‬ ‫ﻭﻗﺘﺸﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﻛﻨﻢ‬

‫ﺍﻣﺎ ﺍﮔﺮ ﮔﻮﻳﻨﺪﺓ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻛﺎﺭﻱ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻛﺴﻲ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﺗﺮﺟﻴﺢ ﻣﻲ ﺩﻫﺪ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍ ﻓﺎﻋﻞ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﻭ‬

‫ﻓﻌﻞ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ﺳﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺁﻭﺭﻳﻢ‪ .‬ﺑﺪﻳﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ‪:‬‬

‫ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ‪ +‬ﻓﺎﻋﻞ ‪it is time +‬‬

‫‪it’s time you finished the job.‬‬ ‫ﻭﻗﺘﺸﻪ ﻛﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﻛﻨﻲ‬

‫‪151‬‬
 ‫ﺣﺬﻑ‪IF‬‬

‫ﺩﺭ ﺟﻤﻼﺕ ﻓﺎﺭﺳﻲ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻴﻜﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﺷﺮﻁ )‪ (if clause‬ﻓﻌﻞ ﻛﻤﻜﻲ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺷـﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷـﺪ ﻣﻴﺘـﻮﺍﻥ ﻛﻠﻤـﺔ ‪ if‬ﺭﺍ‬

‫ﺣﺬﻑ ﻛﺮﺩ ﻛﻪ ﻗﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺁﻥ ﺩﺭ ﺳﻪ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺷﺮﻃﻲ ﻫﺎ ﺑﺪﻳﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬

‫‪(1‬ﺩﺭ ﺷﺮﻃﻲ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻭﻝ‪ :‬ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻲ ﻛﻪ ‪ Should‬ﺑﻜﺎﺭ ﺭﻭﺩ ﻣﻌﻨﻲ ﺍﺣﺘﻤﺎ ﹰﻻ ﻣﻲ ﺩﻫﺪ‪ .‬ﻣﺜ ﹰ‬
‫ﻼ‪:‬‬

‫‪If I should see him, I will tell him.‬‬

‫ﻛﻪ ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻥ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ‪ Should‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﻓﺎﻋﻞ ﻣﻨﺘﻘﻞ ﻛﺮﺩ ﻭ ‪ if‬ﺭﺍ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻛﺮﺩ ﺑﺪﻳﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ‪:‬‬

‫‪Should I see him. I will tell him.‬‬

‫‪(2‬ﺩﺭ ﺷﺮﻃﻲ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺩﻭﻡ‪ :‬ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻓﻌﻞ ﺑﻮﺩﻥ ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ‪ were‬ﺑﻜﺎﺭ ﺭﻓﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺣـﺬﻑ ‪ if‬ﻣﻴﺘـﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ ﺍﺳـﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ‬

‫ﻛﺮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫‪If you were here, I would talk to you.‬‬

‫‪Were you here, I would talk to you.‬‬

‫‪(3‬ﺩﺭ ﺷﺮﻃﻲ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺳﻮﻡ‪ :‬ﻫﻤﻴﺸﻪ ﻓﻌﻞ ﻛﻤﻜﻲ ‪ had‬ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﻛﻪ ﺑـﺮﺍﻱ ﺣـﺬﻑ ‪ if‬ﻣﻴﺘـﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ ﺍﺳـﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛـﺮﺩ ﺑـﺪﻳﻦ‬

‫ﺻﻮﺭﺕ‪:‬‬

‫‪if I had gone there, I would have seen him.‬‬

‫‪Had I gone there, I would have seen him.‬‬

‫ﻧﻜﺘﻪ‪ Should :‬ﺑﻪ ﻣﻌﻨﻲ »ﺍﺣﺘﻤﺎ ﹰﻻ« ﺩﺭ ﺷﺮﻃﻲ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺩﻭﻡ ﻧﻴﺰ ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺑﻜﺎﺭ ﺭﻭﺩ ﻭ ﺑﻨﺎﺑﺮﺍﻳﻦ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺣﺬﻑ ‪ if‬ﻣـﻮﺭﺩ ﺍﺳـﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ‬

‫ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫‪If I should see him now, I would tell him.‬‬

‫‪Should I see him now, I would tell him.‬‬

‫‪152‬‬
 ‫‪Unless‬‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﻛﻠﻤﻪ ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺩﺭ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺷﺮﻃﻲ ﺩﺭ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﺷﺮﻁ )‪ (if clause‬ﺟﺎﻱ ‪ if‬ﻭ ‪ not‬ﺑﻜﺎﺭ ﺭﻭﺩ‪.‬‬

‫ﻼ ﺑﺠﺎﻱ ﺍﻳﻨﻜﻪ ﮔﻔﺘﻪ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺗﻮ ﻣﻮﻓﻖ ﻧﻤﻲ ﺷﻮﻱ ﺍﮔﺮ ﻛﻮﺷﺶ ﻧﻜﻨﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺜ ﹰ‬

‫‪You won't succeed if you don't try.‬‬

‫ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻥ ﺟﻤﻠﺔ ﺷﺮﻃﻲ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻧﻴﺰ ﺑﻴﺎﻥ ﻛﺮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫ﻣﻮﻓﻖ ﻧﻤﻲ ﺷﻮﻱ ﻣﮕﺮ ﺍﻳﻨﻜﻪ ﻛﻮﺷﺶ ﻛﻨﻲ‪.‬‬

‫‪You won’t succeed unless you try.‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﺒﺘﻪ ‪ unless‬ﻣﺜﻞ ‪ if‬ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﻭﺳﻂ ﺩﻭ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻳﺎ ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍﻱ ﺟﻤﻠﺔ ﺍﻭﻝ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫‪Unless you try, you won't succeed.‬‬

‫ﺗﺬﮐﺮ‪:‬‬
‫‪If not = unless‬‬

‫‪If = unless not‬‬

‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‪:‬‬

‫‪Unless you don’t try, you will succeed = Unless you try, you won't succeed.‬‬

‫‪153‬‬
 ‫‪Would rather‬‬
‫ﻼ ﻓﻌﻞ ‪ Prefer‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻌﻨﻲ ﺗﺮﺟﻴﺢ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﻳﺎﺩ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻴﻢ ﻭ ﻣﻴﺪﺍﻧﻴﻢ ﻛﻪ ﻳﻚ ﻓﻌﻞ ﺍﺻﻠﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻝ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻓﻌﻞ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻧﮕﻠﻴﺴﻲ‬
‫ﻗﺒ ﹰ‬

‫‪ would rather‬ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﻳﻚ ﻓﻌﻞ ﻛﻤﻜﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﻪ ﻛﺎﺭﺑﺮﺩﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﺘﻔﺎﻭﺗﻲ ﺑﺎ ‪ prefer‬ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﺑﺪﻳﻦ ﺷﺮﺡ‪:‬‬

‫‪(1‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ‪ Prefer‬ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺑﺎ ‪ to‬ﻭ ﺍﻣﺎ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ‪ would rather‬ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺑﺮﻫﻨﻪ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬

‫‪I prefer to stay there.‬‬

‫ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺑﺎ ‪ + Prefer + to‬ﻓﺎﻋﻞ‬

‫‪I would rather stay there.‬‬

‫ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺑﺮﻫﻨﻪ ‪ + would rather +‬ﻓﺎﻋﻞ‬

‫‪(2‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﻓﺎﻋﻞ ﻛﺎﺭﻱ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺩﻳﮕﺮﻱ ﺗﺮﺟﻴﺢ ﺩﻫﺪ ﺑﺎ ‪ Prefer‬ﻭ ‪ would rather‬ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻬﺎﻱ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺑﻴﺎﻥ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ‪.‬‬

‫‪I prefer to go rather than to stay.‬‬

‫ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺑﺎ ‪ + rather than + to‬ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺑﺎ ‪ + Prefer + to‬ﻓﺎﻋﻞ‬

‫‪I would rather go than stay.‬‬

‫ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺑﺮﻫﻨﻪ ‪ + than +‬ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺑﺮﻫﻨﻪ ‪ + would rather +‬ﻓﺎﻋﻞ‬

‫ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ )‪ (2‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﺍﺳﻤﻲ ﺑﻪ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺩﻳﮕﺮﻱ ﺗﺮﺟﻴﺢ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﺘـﹰﺎ ﺑـﺎ ‪ would rather‬ﻣﻤﻜـﻦ ﻧﻴﺴـﺖ ﺑﻠﻜـﻪ ﺑـﺎ‬

‫‪ prefer‬ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬

‫‪I prefer walking to staying.‬‬

‫‪I prefer apple to banana.‬‬

‫ﺍﺳﻢ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ‪ /‬ﺍﺳﻢ ‪ + to +‬ﺍﺳﻢ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ‪ /‬ﺍﺳﻢ ‪ + prefer +‬ﻓﺎﻋﻞ‬

‫‪154‬‬
‫‪(3‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﻓﺎﻋﻠﻲ ﺗﺮﺟﻴﺢ ﻛﺎﺭﻱ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﻫﺪ ﺑﺎ ‪ Prefer‬ﻭ ‪ would rather‬ﺑﻪ ﺻـﻮﺭﺕ ﻫـﺎﻱ ﺯﻳـﺮ ﺑﻴـﺎﻥ ﻣـﻲ‬

‫ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫‪I Prefered to go.‬‬

‫ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺑﺎ ‪ + Prefer + to‬ﻓﺎﻋﻞ‬

‫‪I would rather have gone.‬‬

‫‪ + would rather + have P.P‬ﻓﺎﻋﻞ‬

‫‪(4‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﻓﺎﻋﻠﻲ ﻛﺎﺭﻱ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻛﺲ ﺩﻳﮕﺮﻱ ﺗﺮﺟﻴﺢ ﺩﻫﺪ ﺑﺎ ‪ Prefer‬ﻭ ‪ would rather‬ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻬﺎﻱ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺑﻴﺎﻥ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪I prefer him to go.‬‬

‫ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺑﺎ ‪ + to‬ﻣﻔﻌﻮﻝ ‪ + prefer +‬ﻓﺎﻋﻞ‬

‫‪I would rather him went.‬‬

‫ﻓﺎﻋﻞ‬ ‫ﻓﺎﻋﻞ ‪+ would rather +‬‬ ‫ﮔﺬﺷﺘﺔ ﺳﺎﺩﻩ‪+‬‬

‫‪155‬‬
 ‫‪as if – as though‬‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﻭ ﺍﺻﻄﻼﺡ ﻫﺮ ﺩﻭ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻌﻨﻲ »ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻳﻨﻜﻪ ـ ﮔﻮﻳﻲ« ﻭﻗﺘﻲ ﺑﻜﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺭﻭﺩ ﻛﻪ ﻓﺎﻋﻠﻲ ﻣﻄﻤﺌﻦ ﻧﺒﺎﺷﺪ ﻛـﻪ ﻛـﺎﺭﻱ ﻭﺍﻗﻌﻴـﺖ‬

‫ﻼ‪:‬‬
‫ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﺑﻠﻜﻪ ﮔﻤﺎﻥ ﻛﻨﺪ ﻳﺎ ﺑﭙﻨﺪﺍﺭﺩ ﻛﻪ ﻛﺎﺭﻱ ﺣﻘﻴﻘﺖ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﻣﺜ ﹰ‬

‫ﺍﻭ ﻃﻮﺭﻱ ﺭﻓﺘﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ ﻛﻪ ﮔﻮﺋﻲ ﻫﻤﺴﺮﺵ ﺭﺍ ﺩﻭﺳﺖ ﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ‪.‬‬

‫‪He behaves as if he didn’t like his wife.‬‬

‫ﭼﻮﻥ ﺟﻤﻼﺕ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ‪ as if‬ﻭ ‪ as thought‬ﻏﻴﺮﻭﺍﻗﻌﻲ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﻗﺎﻧﻮﻥ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺑﺪﻳﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺍﺳﺖ‬

‫ﻛﻪ ﺍﮔﺮ ﻛﺎﺭﻱ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺣﺎﻝ ﭘﻨﺪﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ‪ as if‬ﻭ ‪ as thought‬ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ﺳﺎﺩﻩ ﺑﻜﺎﺭ ﺭﻭﺩ‪.‬‬

‫‪She speaks as if she knew the problem.‬‬

‫ﻃﻮﺭﻱ ﺣﺮﻑ ﻣﻲ ﺯﻧﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺍﻧﮕﺎﺭ ﻣﺴﺌﻠﻪ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻲ ﺩﺍﻧﺪ‪.‬‬

‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﻛﺎﺭﻱ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ﭘﻨﺪﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ‪ as if‬ﻭ ‪ as thought‬ﮔﺬﺷﺘﺔ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﺑﻜﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺭﻭﺩ‪.‬‬

‫‪He walked as if he had had a broken leg.‬‬

‫ﺍﻭ ﻃﻮﺭﻱ ﺭﺍﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺭﻓﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺍﻧﮕﺎﺭ ﭘﺎﻳﺶ ﺷﻜﺴﺘﻪ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬

‫‪156‬‬
 ‫ﻧﻜﻨﻪ( » ‪« in Case‬‬ ‫)ﻣﺒﺎﺩﺍ‬

‫ﻼ‪:‬‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺻﻄﻼﺡ ﻭﻗﺘﻲ ﺑﻜﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺭﻭﺩ ﻛﻪ ﻓﺎﻋﻠﻲ ﻛﺎﺭﻱ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺩﻫﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﺯ ﺗﺮﺱ ﺍﻳﻨﻜﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻧﺎﮔﻮﺍﺭ ﺩﻳﮕﺮﻱ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ‪ .‬ﻣﺜ ﹰ‬

‫ﻣﻦ ﻳﻚ ﭼﺘﺮ ﺑﺎ ﺧﻮﺩﻡ ﺑﺮﻣﻲ ﺩﺍﺭﻡ‪ .‬ﻣﺒﺎﺩﺍ ﺑﺎﺭﺍﻥ ﺑﺒﺎﺭﺩ‪.‬‬

‫‪I take an umbrella with me in case it rains.‬‬

‫‪ :In case‬ﺩﺭ ﺟﻤﻼﺕ ﺍﻧﮕﻠﻴﺴﻲ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﻲ ﺑﻜﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺭﻭﺩ‪.‬‬

‫ﺣﺎﻝ ﺳﺎﺩﻩ ‪ + {incase} +‬ﺣﺎﻝ ﺳﺎﺩﻩ‪/‬ﺣﺎﻝ ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭﻱ‪/‬ﺣﺎﻝ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﺁﻳﻨﺪﻩ‪/‬ﺍﻣﺮ‬

‫‪Helen has left the door open, in case Her mother comes earlier.‬‬

‫ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ﺳﺎﺩﻩ ‪ + {incase} +‬ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ﺳﺎﺩﻩ‪/‬ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭﻱ‪/‬ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ‬

‫‪She was running fast in case she missed the class.‬‬

‫‪157‬‬
 ‫‪Both‬‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﻛﻠﻤﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻌﻨﻲ ﻫﺮ ﺩﻭ ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺩﺭ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﻧﮕﻠﻴﺴﻲ ﻫﻢ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺑﻜﺎﺭ ﺑﺮﻭﺩ ﻭ ﻫﻢ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺳﻢ‪.‬‬

‫‪(1‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺑﻜﺎﺭ ﺭﻭﺩ ﺑﻪ ﻳﻜﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻬﺎﻱ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺑﻮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫‪both of‬‬ ‫‪the‬‬

‫‪‬‬
‫ﻓﻌﻞ ‪ +‬ﺍﺳﻢ ‪both the  +‬‬
‫‪both‬‬ ‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬

‫ﻓﻌﻞ ‪ +‬ﺿﻤﻴﺮ ‪both of +‬‬

‫‪Both students study hard.‬‬

‫‪Both of us study hard.‬‬
‫‪(2‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺑﻜﺎﺭ ﺭﻭﺩ ﺩﺭ ﻳﻜﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺎﻟﺘﻬﺎﻱ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺑﻮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫ﻓﻌﻞ ‪ + both +‬ﺍﺳﻢ‬ ‫‪The students both study hard.‬‬

‫ﻓﻌﻞ ‪ + both‬ﻓﻌﻞ ﻛﻤﻜﻲ ‪ +‬ﺍﺳﻢ‬ ‫‪The students can both study hard.‬‬

‫‪ + to be + both‬ﺍﺳﻢ‬ ‫‪The students are both studying hard.‬‬

‫‪ both -‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﻓﻌﻞ ﻛﻤﻜﻲ ﻭ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﻓﻌﻞ ﺍﺻﻠﻲ ﻣﻲﺁﻳﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪158‬‬
 ‫‪active & passive voice :‬‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻡ ﻭ ﻣﺠﻬﻮﻝ‬

‫ﻛﻠﻤﻪ ‪ Voice‬ﺭﺍ ﺗﺎ ﺣﺎﻻ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻌﻨﻲ ﺻﺪﺍ ﺷﻨﺎﺧﺘﻪ ﺍﻳﻢ ﺍﻣﺎ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻡ ﻭ ﻣﺠﻬﻮﻝ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻌﻨﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺍﺳﺖ ‪ active‬ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ‬

‫ﻭ ‪ passive‬ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﮔﺬﺭﺍ ‪.‬‬

‫ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﺠﻬﻮﻝ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻋﻠﺖ ‪ passive‬ﻧﺎﻣﻴﺪﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺳﺮ ﻓﺎﻋﻞ ﻣﻲ ﮔﺬﺭﻳﻢ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﻭﺍﻗﻊ ﻣﻔﻌﻮﻝ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻄﺮﺡ‬

‫ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ ‪.‬‬

‫ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻡ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻋﻠﺖ ‪ active‬ﻣﻲ ﮔﻮﻳﻨﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻓﺎﻋﻞ ﺩﺭ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﻣﻄﺮﺡ ﻭ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬

‫ﺣﺎﻝ ﺑﺒﻴﻨﻴﻢ ﻓﺎﻋﻞ ) ‪ ( Subject‬ﭼﻪ ﺍﻧﻮﺍﻋﻲ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ‪.‬‬

‫‪ -1‬ﻓﺎﻋﻞ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺁﻥ ‪ doer‬ﮔﻮﻳﻨﺪ ‪.‬‬

‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ‪:‬‬

‫ﻫﻠﻦ ﻛﺘﺎﺏ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻲ ﺧﻮﺍﻧﺪ ‪Hellen studies the book . .‬‬

‫‪ -2‬ﻓﺎﻋﻞ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﻛﺴﻲ ﻳﺎ ﭼﻴﺰﻱ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺑﺮﺍﻭ ﻭﺍﻗﻊ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻛﻪ ﭼﻨﻴﻦ ﻓﺎﻋﻠﻲ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻧﮕﻠﻴﺴﻲ ‪Subject‬‬

‫‪ Sufferer‬ﻧﺎﻡ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﻣﺜ ﹰ‬
‫ﻼ‪:‬‬

‫‪Hellen is seen by them.‬‬

‫‪ -3‬ﻓﺎﻋﻞ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﻫﻴﭻ ﻳﻚ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺑﺎﻻ ﻧﺒﺎﺷﺪ ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﻧﻪ ﻛﺎﺭﻱ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻭ ﻧﻪ ﻛﺎﺭﻱ ﺑﺮﺍﻭ ﻭﺍﻗﻊ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻛـﻪ‬

‫ﭼﻨﻴﻦ ﻓﺎﻋﻠﻲ ﺭﺍ ‪ neither doer not sufferer‬ﮔﻮﻳﻨﺪ ‪ .‬ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ‪:‬‬

‫‪Hellen is a student.‬‬

‫ﺩﺭ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﺠﻬﻮﻝ ‪ Subject‬ﺍﺯ ﻧﻮﻉ ‪ sufferer‬ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﺟﻤﻠـﻪ ﻫـﺎﻱ ﻣﻌﻠـﻮﻡ ‪ Subject‬ﺍﺯ ﺩﻭ ﻧـﻮﻉ ﺩﻳﮕـﺮ‬

‫ﺍﺳﺖ ‪.‬‬

‫‪159‬‬
‫ﻼ ﻳﺎﺩ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻴﻢ ﻛﻪ ﺻﻔﺖ ﻣﺨﺼﻮﺹ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﺳﺖ ‪ .‬ﺣـﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻳـﺪ ﺩﺍﻧﺴـﺖ ﻛـﻪ ﺻـﻔﺖ ﻓﻌـﻞ ﻧﻴـﺰ ﻭﺟـﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﻛـﻪ ﺑـﻪ ﺁﻥ‬
‫ﻗﺒ ﹰ‬

‫‪ participle‬ﺻﻔﺖ ﻓﺎﻋﻞ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﺻﻔﺖ ﻓﺎﻋﻠﻲ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﺻﻔﺖ ﻣﻔﻌﻮﻟﻲ ﮔﻮﻳﻨﺪ ‪.‬‬

‫‪present participle‬‬
‫‪Participle‬‬
‫‪Past participle‬‬

‫ﺻﻔﺖ ﻓﺎﻋﻠﻲ‪ :‬ﺑﺎ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ‪ ing‬ﺑﻪ ﺁﺧﺮ ﻓﻌﻞ ﺣﺎﺻﻞ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ‪ .‬ﻣﺜﻞ ‪:‬‬

‫ﺯﻧﺪﮔﻲ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ‬ ‫‪live‬‬ ‫‪Æ living = alive‬‬ ‫ﺯﻧﺪﻩ‬

‫ﺩﻭﻳﺪﻥ‬ ‫‪run Æ‬‬ ‫‪running‬‬ ‫ﺩﻭﺍﻥ‬

‫ﻫﻤﻪ ﺍﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺻﻔﺖ ﻓﺎﻋﻠﻲ ﺩﺍﺭﻧﺪ ﺯﻳﺮﺍ ﻫﺮ ﻓﻌﻠﻲ ﻧﺎﮔﺰﻳﺮ ﺳﻮﮊﻩ ﻳﺎ ﻓﺎﻋﻠﻲ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ‪.‬‬

‫ﺻﻔﺖ ﻣﻔﻌﻮﻟﻲ‪ :‬ﺩﺭ ﻓﻌﻠﻬﺎﻱ ﺑﺎ ﻗﺎﻋﺪﻩ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ‪ ed‬ﺣﺎﺻﻞ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﻓﻌﻠﻬﺎﻱ ﺑﻲ ﻗﺎﻋﺪﻩ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺧﺎﺹ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ‪.‬‬

‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ‪:‬‬

‫ﺷﺴﺘﻦ‬ ‫‪wash‬‬ ‫‪Æ washed‬‬ ‫ﺷﺴﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ‬

‫ﺍﻓﺘﺎﺩﻥ‬ ‫‪fall‬‬ ‫‪Æ‬‬ ‫‪fallen‬‬ ‫ﺍﻓﺘﺎﺩﻩ‬

‫ﻫﻤﻪ ﻓﻌﻠﻬﺎ ﺻﻔﺖ ﻣﻔﻌﻮﻟﻲ ﻧﺪﺍﺭﻧﺪ ﺑﻠﻜﻪ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻓﻌﻠﻬﺎﻱ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﻱ ﺻﻔﺖ ﻣﻔﻌﻮﻟﻲ ﺩﺍﺭﻧﺪ ﺯﻳﺮﺍ ﻓﻌﻠﻬـﺎﻱ ﻻﺯﻡ ﻛـﻪ ﻣﻔﻌـﻮﻝ ﻧﻤـﻲ‬

‫ﭘﺬﻳﺮﻧﺪ ﻧﻤﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻨﺪ ﺻﻔﺖ ﻓﺎﻋﻠﻲ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ ‪.‬‬

‫ﻼ‪:‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺘﻪ ﮔﺎﻫﻲ ﺍﻭﻗﺎﺕ ﺩﺭ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﻳﻚ ﻓﻌﻞ ﻻﺯﻡ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﻪ ﻳﻚ ﻣﻔﻌﻮﻝ ﺑﺮﺧﻮﺭﺩ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ ‪ .‬ﻣﺜ ﹰ‬

‫‪I go with him .‬‬

‫‪160‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﭼﻨﻴﻦ ﺣﺎﻟﺘﻲ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺩﺍﻧﺴﺖ ﻛﻪ ‪ go‬ﻓﻌﻞ ﻻﺯﻡ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭ ﻣﻔﻌﻮﻝ ﻧﻤﻲ ﭘﺬﻳﺮﺩ ﻭ ‪ him‬ﻣﻔﻌﻮﻝ ‪ go‬ﻧﻴﺴﺖ ﺑﻠﻜﻪ ﺑﺨﺎﻃﺮ‬

‫ﺣﺮﻑ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ‪ with‬ﺷﻜﻞ ﻣﻔﻌﻮﻟﻲ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ‪.‬‬

‫ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﻣﺠﻬﻮﻝ‬

‫ﺗﺎ ﻛﻨﻮﻥ ﻣﺼﺪﺭﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﻲ ﺭﺍ ﻳﺎﺩ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻴﻢ ﻣﺜﻞ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺳﺎﺩﻩ – ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭﻱ – ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺩﻳﮕﺮﻱ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺼـﺪﺭ ﻭﺟـﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‬

‫ﻛﻪ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﻣﺠﻬﻮﻝ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻤﺎﻥ ﺁﻥ ﺑﺪﻳﻦ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺍﺳﺖ ‪:‬‬

‫‪To be + p p‬‬

‫ﺩﺭ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﺠﻬﻮﻝ ﻓﻌﻞ ‪ to be‬ﻭ ‪ p.p‬ﻓﻌﻞ ﺣﻀﻮﺭ ﺩﺍﺭﻧﺪ ‪.‬‬

‫ﻃﺮﻳﻘﻪ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻳﻚ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻡ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺠﻬﻮﻝ‬

‫ﮔﺎﻫﻲ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺍﻱ ﻣﻄﺮﺡ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻭ ﺧﻮﺍﺳﺘﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺗﺎ ﺁﻧﺮﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺠﻬﻮﻝ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻣﺠﻬﻮﻝ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﻳﻚ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻣﺜﻞ‬

‫‪:‬‬

‫‪He tells her.‬‬

‫ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻣﺮﺍﺣﻞ ﺯﻳﺮﺭﺍ ﻃﻲ ﻛﺮﺩ ‪:‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﻒ ( ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺩﻳﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺁﻳﺎ ﻓﻌﻞ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻡ‪ ،‬ﻣﺘﻌﺪﻱ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻳﺎ ﻻﺯﻡ ﺯﻳﺮﺍ ﺍﮔﺮ ﻓﻌﻞ ﻻﺯﻡ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺠﻬﻮﻝ‬

‫ﻧﻴﺴﺖ ‪.‬‬

‫ﺏ ( ﻣﻔﻌﻮﻝ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻡ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍﻱ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻣﺠﻬﻮﻝ ﻣﻨﺘﻘﻞ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ‪ Subject sufferer‬ﺩﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺁﻭﺭﻳﻢ‬

‫‪He tells her.‬‬

‫‪She ----------.‬‬

‫‪161‬‬
 ‫ﺝ ( ﻓﺎﻋﻞ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻡ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻧﺘﻬﺎﻱ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻣﺠﻬﻮﻝ ﻣﻨﺘﻘﻞ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ‪ by‬ﺑﻜﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺮﻳﻢ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻴﻜﻪ ﺿﻤﻴﺮ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬

‫ﺑﻪ ﺷﻜﻞ ﻣﻔﻌﻮﻟﻲ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺑﻮﺩ ‪.‬‬

‫‪He tells her.‬‬

‫‪She ----------- by him.‬‬

‫ﺩ ( ﻓﻌﻞ ﺍﺻﻠﻲ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻡ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ‪ p . p‬ﺩﺭ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻣﺠﻬﻮﻝ ﺑﻜﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺮﻳﻢ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ‬

‫‪He tells her.‬‬

‫‪She -----------told by him.‬‬
‫ﻫـ ( ﻓﻌﻞ ‪ to be‬ﺭﺍ ﻣﺘﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺑﺎ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻡ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ‪ p . p‬ﺩﺭ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻣﺠﻬﻮﻝ ﺑﻜﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺮﻳﻢ ‪.‬‬

‫‪He tells her.‬‬

‫‪She is told by him.‬‬

‫ﺗﻤﺮﻳﻦ ﺟﻤﻼﺕ ﻓﺎﺭﺳﻲ ‪:‬‬

‫ﺟﻤﻼﺕ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻧﮕﻠﻴﺴﯽ ﺗﺮﺟﻤﻪ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪ -1‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻇﺮﻓﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ‪ 5‬ﺭﻭﻱ ﻗﻔﺴﻪ ﭼﻴﺪﻩ ﺷﻮﺩ ‪.‬‬

‫‪ -2‬ﺍﻭ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﻓﻮﺭﹰﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺩﺍﺭﻩ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺷﻮﺩ ‪.‬‬

‫‪ -3‬ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺪﻳﺮ ﻗﺒ ﹰ‬
‫ﻼ ﺍﻃﻼﻉ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﺪ ‪.‬‬

‫‪ -4‬ﺁﻥ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺣﺎﻻ ﻓﺮﻭﺧﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ‪.‬‬

‫‪ -5‬ﻓﻜﺮ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻢ ﻛﻪ ﺁﻥ ﺧﺎﻧﻪ ﺑﻮﺳﻴﻠﻪ ﺑﻤﺐ ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻥ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ‪.‬‬

‫‪ -6‬ﺁﻗﺎﻱ ﺑﺮﺍﻭﻥ ﭘﺎﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ ﺍﺩﺍﺭﻩ ﺍﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺷﺪ ‪.‬‬

‫‪ -7‬ﺩﺳﺘﮕﻴﺮﻩ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﺭ ﺑﻮﺳﻴﻠﻪ ﺁﻥ ﺑﭽﻪ ﺷﻜﺴﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ‪.‬‬

‫‪162‬‬
 ‫‪ -8‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻛﻔﺸﻬﺎ ﭘﺎﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺩﻭﺧﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﻧﺪ ‪.‬‬

‫‪ -9‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺗﺎﻕ ﻫﻢ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺍﻣﺮﻭﺯ ﺭﻧﮓ ﺷﻮﺩ ‪.‬‬

‫‪-10‬ﺑﭽﻪ ﻫﺎ ﻫﺮ ﺭﻭﺯ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺁﻥ ﺯﻥ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺪﺭﺳﻪ ﺑﺮﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ‪.‬‬

‫ﺗﻤﺮﻳﻦ ﺟﻤﻼﺕ ﻓﺎﺭﺳﻲ ‪:‬‬

‫ﺟﻤﻼﺕ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻧﮕﻠﻴﺴﯽ ﺗﺮﺟﻤﻪ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪ -1‬ﺁﻥ ﺧﺒﺮ ﺩﻳﺸﺐ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﺩﻳﻮ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺷﺪ ‪.‬‬

‫‪ -2‬ﺁﻳﺎ ﺁﻥ ﺑﻴﻤﺎﺭ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺁﻥ ﭘﺰﺷﻚ ﺟﺮﺍﺣﻲ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ‪.‬‬

‫‪ -3‬ﺁﻣﺮﻳﻜﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺳﺎﻝ ‪ 1694‬ﻛﺸﻒ ﺷﺪ ‪.‬‬

‫‪ -4‬ﻓﻜﺮ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻢ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻤﺎﻥ ﺩﻭ ﺳﺎﻝ ﭘﻴﺶ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ‪.‬‬

‫‪ -5‬ﺑﻪ ﻣﻦ ﮔﻔﺘﻪ ﺷﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺗﻮ ﻧﺨﻮﺍﻫﻲ ﺁﻣﺪ ‪.‬‬

‫‪ -6‬ﺑﭽﻪ ﻫﺎ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻴﺎﻥ ﺁﺗﺶ ﺑﻪ ﺑﻴﺮﻭﻥ ﺍﺯ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻤﺎﻥ ﺑﺮﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﻮﺩﻧﺪ ‪.‬‬

‫‪ -7‬ﺁﻥ ﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺑﻮﺳﻴﻠﻪ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺩﻳﺮﻭﺯ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﻇﻬﺮ ﭘﺴﺖ ﺷﺪ ‪.‬‬

‫‪ -8‬ﺁﻥ ﺧﺎﻧﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻗﻴﻤﺖ ‪ 80‬ﻣﻴﻠﻴﻮﻥ ﺗﻮﻣﺎﻥ ﻓﺮﻭﺧﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ‪.‬‬

‫‪ -9‬ﻛﺎﺭﺗﻬﺎ ﺑﻮﺳﻴﻠﻪ ﺁﻗﺎﻱ ﺑﺮﺍﻭﻥ ﻣﻨﻘﺶ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ ‪.‬‬

‫‪163‬‬
 ‫ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺠﻬﻮﻝ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ‬

:‫ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺳﺎﺩﻩ‬-1

Helen tells Bob Æ Bob is told by Helen.

:‫ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ﺳﺎﺩﻩ‬-2

Helene told Bob Æ Bob was told by Helen.

:‫ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺁﻳﻨﺪﻩ ﺳﺎﺩﻩ‬-3

Helen will tell Bob Æ Bob will be told by Helen.

:‫ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭﻱ‬-4

Helen is telling Bob Æ Bob is being told by Helen.

:‫ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭﻱ‬-5

Helen was telling Bob Æ Bob was being told by Helen.

:‫ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺣﺎﻝ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ‬-6

Helen has told Bob Æ Bob has been told by Helen.

:‫ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺁﻳﻨﺪﻩ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ‬-7

Helen will have told Bob Æ Bob will have been told by Helen.
:‫ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ‬-8

Helen had told Bob Æ Bob had been told by Helen.

‫ ﺁﻳﻨـﺪﻩ ﻛﺎﻣـﻞ ﺍﺳـﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭﻱ ﻭﮔﺬﺷـﺘﻪ ﻛﺎﻣـﻞ‬،‫ ﺣﺎﻝ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﺳـﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭﻱ‬،‫ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺁﻳﻨﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭﻱ‬4 ‫ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺍﻧﮕﻠﻴﺴﻲ‬16 ‫ﺍﺯ ﺑﻴﻦ‬

. ‫ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭﻱ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻣﺠﻬﻮﻝ ﻧﻴﺴﺘﻨﺪ‬

164
 ‫ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻳﻚ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺳﺌﻮﺍﻟﻲ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻡ ﺑﻪ ﺳﺌﻮﺍﻟﻲ ﻣﺠﻬﻮﻝ‬

‫? ‪Did Hellen study the book‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺑﻪ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺳﺌﻮﺍﻟﻲ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻡ ﻣﺜﻞ‬

‫ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻣﺠﻬﻮﻝ ‪ :‬ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺠﻬﻮﻝ ﺧﺒﺮﻱ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‬

‫‪The book was studied by Hellen .‬‬

‫ﺳﭙﺲ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺣﺎﺻﻞ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺳﺌﻮﺍﻟﻲ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ ‪.‬‬

‫?‪Was the book studied by Hellen‬‬

‫ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻳﻚ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺳﺌﻮﺍﻟﻲ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻡ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎ ﻛﻠﻤﻪ ﭘﺮﺳﺸﻲ ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺠﻬﻮﻝ‬

‫? ‪Where did Hellen take the book‬ﺑـﻪ ﺻـﻮﺭﺕ‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺑﻪ ﺟﻤﻠـﻪ ﺳـﺌﻮﺍﻟﻲ ﻣﻌﻠـﻮﻡ ﻣﺜـﻞ ‪:‬‬

‫ﻣﺠﻬﻮﻝ ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺻﺮﻑ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺍﺯ ﻛﻠﻤﻪ ﭘﺮﺳﺸﻲ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺑﻪ ﺳﺆﺍﻟﻲ ﻣﺠﻬﻮﻝ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ‪.‬‬

‫‪Was the book taken by Helen.‬‬

‫ﺳﭙﺲ ﻛﻠﻤﻪ ﭘﺮﺳﺸﻲ ﺭﺍ ﻫﺮ ﭼﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺍﻟﺒﺘﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﺯ ) ‪ ( whom,who‬ﺑﻪ ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍﻱ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻣﺠﻬﻮﻝ ﻣﻨﺘﻘﻞ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ‪.‬‬

‫?‪Where was the book taken by Helen‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﺒﺘﻪ ‪ who‬ﻭ ‪ whom‬ﺩﺭ ﺟﻤﻼﺕ ﻣﺠﻬﻮﻝ ﺷﻜﻞ ﻣﺨﺼﻮﺻﻲ ﭘﻴﺪﺍ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻨﺪ ﺑﺪﻳﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ‪:‬‬

‫‪ -1‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﻲ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﻢ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎ ﻛﻠﻤﻪ ﭘﺮﺳﺸﻲ ‪ whom‬ﺳﺆﺍﻟﻲ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷـﺪ ﻭ ﺑﺨـﻮﺍﻫﻴﻢ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺠﻬـﻮﻝ‬

‫ﻛﻨﻴﻢ ﻃﺒﻖ ﻣﺮﺍﺣﻞ ﺍﺑﺠﺪ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺠﻬﻮﻝ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﻜﺘـﻪ ﻛـﻪ ﭼـﻮﻥ ‪ whom‬ﺩﺭ ﺟﻤﻠـﻪ ﻣﻌﻠـﻮﻡ‬

‫ﻣﻔﻌﻮﻝ ﺭﺍ ﭘﺮﺳﻴﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻣﺠﻬﻮﻝ ﺷﻜﻞ ﻓﺎﻋﻞ ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ‪ who‬ﭘﻴﺪﺍ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬

‫ﻣﺜﻞ ‪:‬‬

‫?‪Whom did Helen invite‬‬

‫?‪Who was invited by Helen‬‬

‫ﻭ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺍﻱ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﻢ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎ ﻛﻠﻤﻪ ﭘﺮﺳﺸﻲ ‪ who‬ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻣﺜﻞ‪:‬‬

‫?‪Who saw Helen‬‬

‫‪165‬‬
‫ﻭ ﺑﺨﻮﺍﻫﻴﻢ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺠﻬﻮﻝ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ ﺑﺎﺯ ﻫﻢ ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ﻣﺮﺍﺣﻞ ﺍﺑﺠﺪ ﻋﻤﻞ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﻛـﻪ ﭼـﻮﻥ ‪ by whom‬ﺩﺭ‬

‫ﺁﺧﺮ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻣﻌﻨﻲ ﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ ﺁﻧﺮﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍﻱ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻣﺠﻬﻮﻝ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺮﻳﻢ ﺑﺪﻳﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ‪:‬‬

‫?‪By whom was bob seen‬‬

‫ﺗﻤﺮﻳﻦ ﺟﻤﻼﺕ ﻓﺎﺭﺳﻲ ‪:‬‬

‫ﺟﻤﻼﺕ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻧﮕﻠﻴﺴﯽ ﺗﺮﺟﻤﻪ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪ -1‬ﺁﻳﺎ ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﭘﻮﻝ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺎﻧﻚ ﭘﺲ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪ -2‬ﺁﻥ ﭘﻴﻐﺎﻡ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺩﻳﺮﻭﺯ ﻓﺮﺳﺘﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪ -3‬ﻭﻳﺰﺍﻱ ﭘﺪﺭﻡ ﺩﻳﺮﻭﺯ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺳﻔﺎﺭﺗﺨﺎﻧﻪ ﺗﺠﺪﻳﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪ -4‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻛﺖ ﻭ ﺷﻠﻮﺍﺭ ﺑﻪ ﻭﺳﻴﻠﻪ ﻛﺪﺍﻡ ﺧﻴﺎﻁ ﺩﻭﺧﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬

‫‪ -5‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﻃﺎﻕ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻭﺳﻴﻠﻪ ﻣﺎﺩﺭﻡ ﺗﻤﻴﺰ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪ -6‬ﺁﻥ ﻛﻠﻤﻪ ﻫﻤﻴﺸﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺻﻔﺖ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫‪ -7‬ﺁﻳﺎ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺑﺎﻍ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺧﺎﻧﻪ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫‪ -8‬ﺁﻥ ﻓﺮﺷﻬﺎ ﻛﺠﺎ ﺷﺴﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﻮﺩﻧﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪ -9‬ﻏﺬﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻭﺳﻴﻠﻪ ﺧﺎﻧﻢ ﺑﺮﺍﻭﻥ ﭘﺨﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬

‫‪ -10‬ﭼﺸﻤﻬﺎﻳﺶ ﭼﻪ ﺳﺎﻋﺘﻲ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻨﻪ ﺷﺪﻧﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪166‬‬
 ‫ﺟﺎﻱ ﻗﻴﺪﻫﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺟﻤﻼﺕ ﻣﺠﻬﻮﻝ ‪:‬‬

‫‪ -1‬ﻗﻴﺪ ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ‪ :‬ﺍﺯ ﻗﺒﻞ ﻣﻲ ﺩﺍﻧﻴﻢ ﻛﻪ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺭ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻡ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﻓﻌﻞ ﺍﺻﻠﻲ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺭﻭﺩ ﻣﺜ ﹰ‬
‫ﻼ‪:‬‬

‫‪Helen often visits john.‬‬

‫ﺩﺭ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﺠﻬﻮﻝ ﻧﻴﺰ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﻓﻌﻞ ﺍﺻﻠﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ‪ p.p‬ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺭﻭﺩ‪.‬‬

‫‪John is often visited by Helen.‬‬

‫‪ -2‬ﻗﻴﺪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ‪ :‬ﺍﺯ ﻗﺒﻞ ﻣﻲ ﺩﺍﻧﻴﻢ ﻛﻪ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺩﺭ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻡ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻔﻌﻮﻝ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺭﻭﺩ‪ .‬ﻣﺜ ﹰ‬
‫ﻼ‪:‬‬

‫‪Helen writes letters carefully.‬‬

‫ﺩﺭ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﺠﻬﻮﻝ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﻓﻌﻞ ﺍﺻﻠﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ‪ p.p‬ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺭﻭﺩ ﺑﺪﻳﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ‪:‬‬

‫‪The letters are carefully written by Helen.‬‬

‫‪: just -2‬ﺍﺯ ﻗﺒﻞ ﻣﻲ ﺩﺍﻧﻴﻢ ﻛﻪ ‪ just‬ﺩﺭ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ‪ have‬ﻳﺎ ‪ had‬ﻭ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ‪ p.p‬ﻓﻌﻞ ﺍﺻـﻠﻲ ﺑـﻪ ﻛـﺎﺭ ﻣـﻲ‬

‫ﺭﻭﺩ‪.‬‬

‫ﻼ‪:‬‬
‫ﻣﺜ ﹰ‬

‫‪Helen has just written the letter.‬‬

‫ﺩﺭ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻣﺠﻬﻮﻝ ‪ just‬ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ‪ p.p‬ﻓﻌﻞ ‪ be‬ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﻭﺍﻗﻊ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻭﻟﻴﻦ ‪ p.p‬ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺭﻭﺩ‪.‬‬

‫ﻼ‪:‬‬
‫ﻣﺜ ﹰ‬

‫‪The letter has just been written by Helen.‬‬

‫‪167‬‬
 ‫ﺗﻤﺮﻳﻦ ﺟﻤﻼﺕ ﻓﺎﺭﺳﻲ ‪:‬‬

‫ﺟﻤﻼﺕ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍ ﺗﺮﺟﻤﻪ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺁﻥ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺠﻬﻮﻝ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪ -1‬ﻓﻜﺮ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻢ ﻛﻪ ﺁﻥ ﺑﭽﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺷﻜﺴﺘﻪ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬

‫‪ -2‬ﺁﻥ ﻟﻴﻮﺍﻥ ﺷﻴﺮ ﺭﺍ ﻫﻤﻴﻦ ﺍﻻﻥ ﺑﺮﺍﺩﺭ ﺑﺰﺭﮔﺘﺮﻡ ﻧﻮﺷﻴﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪ -3‬ﺁﻳﺎ ﭘﻠﻴﺴﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻻﺧﺮﻩ ﺁﻥ ﺟﻴﺐ ﺑﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﻴﺮ ﻛﺮﺩﻧﺪ؟‬

‫‪ -4‬ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺧﺎﻧﻮﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﺎ ﺭﺍ ﻫﻢ ﺩﻋﻮﺕ ﻛﻨﻨﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪ -5‬ﺩﻛﺘﺮ ﺩﺍﺷﺖ ﭼﺸﻤﻬﺎﻱ ﺁﻥ ﻣﺮﻳﺾ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻗﺖ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻨﻪ ﻣﻲ ﻛﺮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫‪ -6‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ ﺭﺍ ﻫﻤﻴﻦ ﺍﻻﻥ ﭘﺪﺭﻡ ﺭﻧﮓ ﺯﺩﻩ‪.‬‬

‫‪ -7‬ﺁﻥ ﺩﻭ ﻣﻨﺸﻲ ﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺁﺳﺎﻧﺘﺮ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻳﻜﻲ ﺗﺎﻳﭗ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻨﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪ -8‬ﺁﻗﺎﻱ ﺑﺮﺍﻭﻥ ﻛﺎﺭﺵ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻧﻤﻲ ﺩﻫﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪ -9‬ﺁﻗﺎﻱ ﺑﺮﺍﻭﻥ ﺑﭽﻪ ﻫﺎﻳﺶ ﺭﺍ ﺧﻮﺏ ﺗﺮﺑﻴﺖ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪-10‬ﺩﻭﺳﺘﺎﻧﻢ ﺑﻪ ﻓﺮﻭﺷﻨﺪﻩ ﻗﺒ ﹰ‬
‫ﻼ ﮔﻔﺘﻪ ﺑﻮﺩﻧﺪ‪.‬‬

‫ﻣﺠﻬﻮﻝ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺟﻤﻼﺗﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻱ ﺩﻭ ﻣﻔﻌﻮﻝ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ‪.‬‬

‫ﺩﺭ ﺑﻌﻀﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺟﻤﻼﺕ ﻓﻌﻞ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻱ ﺩﻭ ﻣﻔﻌﻮﻝ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻳﻜﻲ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﹰﺎ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﻣﻲ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ ﻭ ﺩﻳﮕﺮﻱ ﻣﻔﻌﻮﻝ‬

‫ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﻛﻪ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﹰﺎ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﻧﻤﻲ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ ﺑﻠﻜﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻭﺍﺳﻄﻪ ﻣﻔﻌﻮﻝ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﺟﻨﺒﻪ ﻣﻔﻌﻮﻝ ﭘﻴﺪﺍ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪I write the letter to him.‬‬

‫ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺫﻛﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﭼﻨﻴﻦ ﺟﻤﻼﺕ ﻣﻌﻤﻮ ﹰﻻ ﻣﻔﻌﻮﻝ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ‪ ،‬ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭ ﻣﻔﻌﻮﻝ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﺳﺖ‬

‫‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻣﺠﻬﻮﻝ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﭼﻨﻴﻦ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺩﻭ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻣﺠﻬﻮﻝ ﺩﺍﺷﺖ ﺯﻳﺮﺍ ﺩﻭ ﻣﻔﻌﻮﻝ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪.‬‬

‫‪168‬‬
‫‪The letter is written to him by me.‬‬
‫‪He is written the letter by me.‬‬

‫ﻣﺠﻬﻮﻝ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻓﻌﻞ ﺣﺴﻲ ﻭ ﺣﺮﻛﺘﻲ ﺩﺍﺭﻧﺪ‪.‬‬

‫ﺑﻪ ﻳﺎﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﻢ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﻓﻌﻞ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺣﺴﻲ ﻭ ﺣﺮﻛﺘﻲ ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍ ﻳﻚ ﻣﻔﻌﻮﻝ ﻭ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺑﺮﻫﻨﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺭﻓﺖ ‪.‬‬

‫‪I saw Helen play.‬‬

‫ﺩﺭ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﺠﻬﻮﻝ ﭼﻮﻥ ﻣﻔﻌﻮﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺩﻭ ﻓﻌﻞ ﺑﺮ ﻣﻲ ﺧﻴﺰﺩ ﺗﺎ ‪ subject suffer‬ﺷﻮﺩ ﺑـﻴﻦ ﺩﻭ ﻓﻌـﻞ ﺍﺻـﻠﻲ ‪to‬‬

‫ﻣﺼﺪﺭﻱ ﻻﺯﻡ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬

‫‪Helen was seen to play.‬‬

‫ﻫﻤﺎﻧﻄﻮﺭ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺑﻴﻨﻴﻢ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺩﺭ ﺟﻤﻼﺕ ﻣﺠﻬﻮﻝ ﻓﻌﻞ ﺣﺴﻲ ﻭ ﺣﺮﻛﺘﻲ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺑﺎ ‪ to‬ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺭﻭﺩ‪.‬‬

‫ﻣﺠﻬﻮﻝ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﻓﻌﻞ ﺍﻣﺮ ‪:‬‬

‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻣﺠﻬﻮﻝ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﻓﻌﻞ ﺍﻣﺮ ﺍﺯ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪:‬‬

‫‪ + be + p.p‬ﻣﻔﻌﻮﻝ ‪let +‬‬

‫‪Open the door Æ let the door be opened.‬‬

‫‪169‬‬
 ‫ﺳﺒﺒﻲ ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺟﻤﻼﺕ ﺳﺒﺒﻲ ﻳﺎ ﻭﺟﻪ‬

‫ﻼ‬
‫ﺟﻤﻼﺕ ﺳﺒﺒﻲ ﺑﻪ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﮔﻔﺘﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﻓﺎﻋﻞ ﺳﺒﺐ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺗﺎ ﻓﺎﻋﻞ ﺩﻳﮕﺮﻱ ﻛﺎﺭﻱ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺩﻫﺪ ﻣـﺜ ﹰ‬

‫ﻣﻦ ﻭﺍﺩﺍﺭ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻢ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﺍﻣﻴﺪﻭﺍﺭﻡ ﺑﺮﺍﺩﺭﻡ ﻛﻔﺸﻬﺎ ﻳﻢ ﺭﺍ ﻭﺍﻛﺲ ﺑﺰﻧﺪ‪.‬‬

‫ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻤﺎﻥ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺳﺒﺒﻲ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻧﮕﻠﻴﺴﻲ ﺑﺪﻳﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬

‫ﻣﻔﻌﻮﻝ ﺍﺻﻠﻲ ‪ +‬ﻓﻌﻞ ﺍﺻﻠﻲ )ﺑﺮﻫﻨﻪ( ‪ +‬ﻓﺎﻋﻞ ﺍﺻﻠﻲ ‪ + have +‬ﻓﺎﻋﻞ ﻣﺴﺒﺐ‬

‫‪I have my brother polish my shoes.‬‬

‫ﻭ ﺍﮔﺮ ﻓﻌﻞ ‪ get‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻓﻌﻞ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺳﺒﺒﻲ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺑﺎ ‪ to‬ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺑﻮﺩ ﻣﺜ ﹰ‬
‫ﻼ‪:‬‬

‫ﻣﻔﻌﻮﻝ ﺍﺻﻠﻲ ‪ +‬ﻓﻌﻞ ﺍﺻﻠﻲ ‪ + to‬ﻓﺎﻋﻞ ﺍﺻﻠﻲ ‪ + get +‬ﻓﺎﻋﻞ ﻣﺴﺒﺐ‬

‫‪I get my brother to polish my shoes.‬‬

‫ﺗﻤﺮﻳﻦ ﺟﻤﻼﺕ ﻓﺎﺭﺳﻲ ‪:‬‬

‫ﺟﻤﻼﺕ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻧﮕﻠﻴﺴﯽ ﺗﺮﺟﻤﻪ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪ -1‬ﺑﺪﻩ ﻳﻚ ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ ﺁﻫﻨﻲ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺗﺎﻕ ﺩﺭﺳﺖ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫‪ -2‬ﻗﺼﺪ ﺩﺍﺭﻡ ﺑﺪﻫﻢ ﻛﺎﺭﮔﺮﻫﺎ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺗﺎﻕ ﺭﺍ ﺩﻭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﺑﺴﺎﺯﻧﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪ -3‬ﺍﻭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺑﻮﺩ ﺍﺗﺎﻗﺶ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻧﮓ ﺁﺑﻲ ﺑﺰﻧﻨﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪170‬‬
 ‫‪ -4‬ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﺪﻫﻢ ﻛﻔﺎﺵ ﺗﺨﺖ ﻛﻔﺸﻢ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻌﻤﻴﺮ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪ -5‬ﺍﻭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻳﻚ ﺩﺭ ﭼﻮﺑﻲ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻣﻐﺎﺯﻩ ﺍﺵ ﺩﺭﺳﺖ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫‪ -6‬ﻣﻦ ﻣﻲ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻢ ﺑﺪﻫﻢ ﺧﺎﻧﻪ ﺍﻡ ﺗﺰﺋﻴﻦ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫‪ -7‬ﻣﻦ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﻛﺎﻓﻲ ﭘﻮﻝ ﺩﺍﺭﻡ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺪﻫﻢ ﺑﺎﻏﭽﻪ ﺍﻡ ﺩﺭﺳﺖ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫‪ -8‬ﻫﻠﻦ ﻣﻲ ﺧﻮﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺪﻫﺪ ﻳﻚ ﺩﺭ ﭼﻮﺑﻲ ﺩﺭﺳﺖ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫‪ -9‬ﻣﻦ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺁﻥ ﻣﺮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﻭﺍﺩﺍﺭ ﻛﻨﻢ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺮﻓﻬﺎﻱ ﺁﻥ ﭘﺸﺖ ﺑﺎﻡ ﺭﺍ ﭘﺎﺭﻭ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪ -10‬ﺗﻮ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﺪﻫﻲ ﻣﺄﻣﻮﺭ ﻓﻨﻲ ﻫﻤﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﭼﺮﺍﻍﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻌﻤﻴﺮ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬

‫ﻣﺠﻬﻮﻝ ﺟﻤﻼﺕ ﺳﺒﺒﻲ‬

‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻣﺠﻬﻮﻝ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺟﻤﻼﺕ ﺳﺒﺒﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫‪ p.p‬ﻓﻌﻞ ﺍﺻﻠﻲ ‪ +‬ﻣﻔﻌﻮﻝ ﺍﺻﻠﻲ ‪ + have/get +‬ﻓﺎﻋﻞ ﺳﺒﺐ‬

‫‪I have my shoes polished.‬‬

‫‪171‬‬
 ‫‪reported speach‬‬ ‫ﻧﻘﻞ ﻗﻮﻝ‬

‫ﻧﻘﻞ ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﺑﻴﺎﻥ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﻭ ﻗﻮﻝ ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﺳﺨﻦ ﭘﺲ ﻧﻘﻞ ﻗﻮﻝ ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﺑﻴﺎﻥ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺳﺨﻦ ﻛﺲ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺑﻴـﺎﻥ ﻛـﺮﺩﻥ ﺳـﺨﻦ ﻳـﺎ‬

‫ﮔﻔﺘﻪ ﻳﻚ ﮔﻮﻳﻨﺪﻩ ﺩﻭ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﻳﻚ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﻪ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﻭ ﻳﻚ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﻪ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ‪.‬‬

‫‪ .1‬ﻧﻘﻞ ﻗﻮﻝ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ) ‪( direct speech‬‬

‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺣﺮﻓﻬﺎﻱ ﮔﻮﻳﻨﺪﻩ ﺍﻱ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺩﺧﻞ ﻭ ﺗﺼﺮﻑ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻛﺲ ﺩﻳﮕﺮﻱ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﹰﺎ ﻧﻘﻞ ﻛﻨـﻴﻢ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑـﻪ ﺭﻭﺵ ﻣﺴـﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﻧﻘـﻞ‬

‫ﻣﻲﻛﻨﻴﻢ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﮔﻮﻳﻨﺪﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﻳﻜﻲ ﺍﺯ ﭼﻬﺎﺭ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪Helen says, “I live in Tehran”.‬‬ ‫‪ -1‬ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺧﺒﺮﻱ ﻣﺜﻞ ‪:‬‬

‫”?‪Helen says, “where do you live‬‬ ‫‪ -2‬ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺳﺆﺍﻟﻲ ﻣﺜﻞ ‪:‬‬

‫‪Helen says, “open the window”.‬‬ ‫‪ -3‬ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺍﻣﺮﻱ ﺍﺳﺖ ‪:‬‬

‫”‪Helen says, “what a nice car it is‬‬ ‫‪ -4‬ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺗﻌﺠﺒﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ ‪:‬‬

‫ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﻓﻌﻞ ﮔﺰﺍﺭﺵ ﮔﺮ ﻭ ﻓﺎﻋﻞ ﺁﻧﺮﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻧﺘﻬﺎﻱ ﻧﻘﻞ ﻗﻮﻝ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺑﺮﺩ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ‪:‬‬

‫‪“I live in Tehran,” Helen says.‬‬

‫‪“Where do you live?” Helen says.‬‬
‫‪“Open the window,” Helen says.‬‬
‫‪“What a nice car it is!” Helen says.‬‬
‫ﻼ‪:‬‬
‫ﺣﺘﻲ ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻥ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻓﻌﻞ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮ ﻓﺎﻋﻞ ﻣﻘﺪﻡ ﻛﺮﺩ ﺍﻟﺒﺘﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺷﺮﻁ ﺍﻳﻨﻜﻪ ﻓﺎﻋﻞ ﺿﻤﻴﺮ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻧﻪ ﺍﺳﻢ ﻣﺜ ﹰ‬

‫‪“I live in Tehran,” Says she.‬‬

‫‪172‬‬
 ‫ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ‪Indirect speech‬‬ ‫ﻧﻘﻞ ﻗﻮﻝ ﻏﻴﺮ‬

‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺩﺭ ﺳﺨﻦ ﻳﺎ ﮔﻔﺘﺔ ﮔﻮﻳﻨﺪﻩ ﺍﻱ ﺩﺧﻞ ﻭ ﺗﺼﺮﻑ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻧﻘﻞ ﻗﻮﻝ ﺑﻪ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﻪ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺷﺪﻩ ‪ .‬ﻣﻌﻤﻮ ﹰﻻ ﻳﻚ ﺟﻤﻠـﻪ‬

‫ﻧﻘﻞ ﻗﻮﻝ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻭ ﻣﻲ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻨﺪ ﺍﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺑﻪ ﻧﻘﻞ ﻗﻮﻝ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﻛﻪ ﻗﻮﺍﻧﻴﻦ ﺁﻥ ﺑﺪﻳﻦ ﺷﺮﺡ ﺍﺳﺖ‪:‬‬

‫ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻳﻚ ﻧﻘﻞ ﻗﻮﻝ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﺧﺒﺮﻱ ﺑﻪ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ‪.‬‬

‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﻻﺯﻡ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻳﻚ ﺟﻤﻠﺔ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﺧﺒﺮﻱ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺟﻤﻠﺔ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻧﻘﻞ ﻗﻮﻝ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ ‪:‬‬

‫”‪Helen said, “I live in Tehran.‬‬

‫ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻗﻮﺍﻋﺪ ﻭ ﻣﺮﺍﺣﻞ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﻃﻲ ﻛﺮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﻒ( ﺣﺬﻑ ‪ comma‬ﻭ ﻛﻮﺗﻴﺸﻦ ﻣﺎﺭﻙ ﻭ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺭﺍﺑﻂ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ) ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻘـﻞ ﺧﺒـﺮﻱ ‪ that‬ﺧﻮﺍﻫـﺪ ﺑـﻮﺩ ( ﺑـﺪﻳﻦ‬

‫ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ‪:‬‬

‫… ‪Helen said that‬‬

‫ﺏ( ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺿﻤﺎﻳﺮ ﻭ ﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﻣﻠﻜﻲ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻨﺎﺳﺐ ‪:‬‬

‫‪Helen said that she ...‬‬

‫ﺝ( ﺍﺟﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺷﺮﻃﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻓﻌﻞ ﮔﺰﺍﺭﺵ ﮔﺮ ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺑﺪﻳﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ‪:‬‬

‫‪Helen said that she lived in Tehran.‬‬

‫ﺩ( ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺑﻌﻀﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺻﻄﻼﺣﺎﺕ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻭ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻭ ﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﺷﺎﺭﻩ ﻭ ﺑﻌﻀﻲ ﺍﺯ ﻓﻌﻠﻬﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺷﺮﻃﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻓﻌـﻞ ﮔﺰﺍﺭﺷـﮕﺮ ﮔﺬﺷـﺘﻪ‬

‫ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬

‫ﺗﻮﺿﻴﺢ ‪ :‬ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺍﺟﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻘﻞ ﻗﻮﻝ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ‪ 12‬ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺍﻧﮕﻠﻴﺴﻲ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻬﺎﻱ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺭﻭﻧﺪ‪:‬‬

‫‪(1‬ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺳﺎﺩﻩ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺑﻪ ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ﺳﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﻣﺜ ﹰ‬

‫ﻼ‪:‬‬

‫‪Helen said to bob, “I know your father”.‬‬

‫‪Helen told Bob that she knew his father.‬‬

‫‪ (2‬ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭﻱ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺑﻪ ﮔﺬﺷﺘﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭﻱ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﻣﺜ ﹰ‬

‫ﻼ‪:‬‬

‫”‪My father said to me, “I am listening to you.‬‬

‫‪My father told me that he was listening to me.‬‬

‫‪173‬‬
 ‫ ﻣﺜ ﹰ‬.‫( ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺣﺎﻝ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺑﻪ ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‬3
:‫ﻼ‬

The boy said to the girl, “I haven’t seen your book.”

The boy told the girl that he hadn’t seen her book.

‫ ﻣﺜ ﹰ‬.‫( ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺣﺎﻝ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭﻱ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺑﻪ ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭﻱ‬4

:‫ﻼ‬

My friend said, “I have been living here for ten years.”

My friend said that he had been living here for ten years.

‫ ﻣﺜ ﹰ‬.‫( ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺁﻳﻨﺪﺓ ﺳﺎﺩﻩ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺑﻪ ﺁﻳﻨﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ﺳﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‬5

:‫ﻼ‬

The man said to the woman, “I will see you.”

The man told the woman that he would see her.

‫ ﻣﺜ ﹰ‬.‫( ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺁﻳﻨﺪﺓ ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭﻱ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺑﻪ ﺁﻳﻨﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭﻱ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‬6

:‫ﻼ‬

Ahmad said, “I will be working on Friday.”

Ahmad said that he would be working on Friday morning.

‫ ﻣﺜ ﹰ‬.‫( ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺁﻳﻨﺪﺓ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺑﻪ ﺁﻳﻨﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‬7

:‫ﻼ‬

Bob said, “I will have finished the book on April.”

Bob said that he would have finished the book on April.

:‫ ﻣﺜﻼ‬.‫( ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺁﻳﻨﺪﺓ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭﻱ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺑﻪ ﺁﻳﻨﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭﻱ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‬8

Bob said, “I will have been studying for two years by April.”
Bob said that he would have been studying for two years by April.

‫ ﻣﺜ ﹰ‬.‫( ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﮔﺬﺷﺘﺔ ﺳﺎﺩﻩ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺑﻪ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‬9

:‫ﻼ‬

My father said to me, “I saw your umberella.”

My father told me that he had seen my umberella.

174
‫ﻳﺎﺩ ﺁﻭﺭﻱ‪ :‬ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻘﻞ ﻗﻮﻝ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ﺳﺎﺩﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻫﻤﺎﻥ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ﻧﮕـﻪ ﺩﺍﺷـﺖ ﻭ ﺗﺒـﺪﻳﻞ ﺑـﻪ‬

‫ﻼ‪:‬‬
‫ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﻧﻜﺮﺩ‪ .‬ﻣﺜ ﹰ‬

‫‪My father told me that he saw my umberella.‬‬

‫‪ (10‬ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭﻱ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺑﻪ ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭﻱ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ‪ .‬ﻣﺜ ﹰ‬

‫ﻼ‪:‬‬

‫”‪Bob said, “I was listening to the music.‬‬

‫‪Bob said that he had been listening to music.‬‬

‫ﻧﻜﺘﻪ‪ :‬ﺩﻭ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﻭ ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭﻱ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻘﻞ ﻗﻮﻝ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻧﻤﻲ ﻛﻨـﺪ ﻭ ﺑـﻪ ﻫﻤـﺎﻥ ﺻـﻮﺭﺕ‬

‫ﻼ‪:‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﻗﻲ ﻣﻲ ﻣﺎﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﻣﺜ ﹰ‬

‫”‪The woman said, “I had left home.‬‬

‫‪The woman said that she had left home.‬‬

‫”‪Bob said, “I had been playing for two hours.‬‬

‫‪Bob said that he had been playing for two hours.‬‬

‫ﻓﻌﻞ ﮔﺰﺍﺭﺷﮕﺮ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻘﻞ ﻗﻮﻝ ﺧﺒـﺮﻱ‬

‫ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﻓﻌﻞ ﮔﺰﺍﺭﺷﮕﺮ ) ‪ ( reporting tag‬ﻣﻔﻌﻮﻝ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﻧﻘﻞ ﻗﻮﻝ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﻣﻲ‬

‫ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻟﺨﻮﺍﻩ ﺍﺯ ‪ say to‬ﻳﺎ ‪ tell‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﺮﺩ ‪ .‬ﻣﺜﻼ‪:‬‬

‫”‪Helen said to/told Bob, “I know your father.‬‬

‫ﺍﻣّﺎ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻘﻞ ﻗﻮﻝ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﺧﺒﺮﻱ ‪ say to‬ﺑﮑﺎﺭ ﻧﻤﻲ ﺭﻭﺩ ﺑﻠﮑﻪ ﺍﺯ ‪ tell‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﻣﺜﻼ‪:‬‬

‫‪Helen told Bob that she knew his father‬‬

‫‪175‬‬
 ‫» ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻳﻚ ﻧﻘﻞ ﻗﻮﻝ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﺳﺌﻮﺍﻟﻲ ﺑﻪ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ «‬

‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻳﻚ ﻧﻘﻞ ﻗﻮﻝ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﺳﺌﻮﺍﻟﻲ ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺑﻪ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ‪:‬‬

‫”?‪Helen said to me, “where do you live‬‬

‫ﻣﺮﺍﺣﻞ ﺫﻛﺮ ﺷﺪﻩ ) ﺍﺑﺠﺪ ( ﺭﺍ ﻃﻲ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺗﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﻛﻪ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺭﺑﻂ ﺩﺭ ﭼﻨﻴﻦ ﺟﻤﻼﺗﻲ ﺧﻮﺩ ﻛﻠﻤـﺎﺕ ‪ wh‬ﻫﺴـﺘﻨﺪ‬

‫ﺑﺪﻳﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ‪:‬‬

‫‪Helen asked me where I lived.‬‬

‫ﺗﻤﺮﻳﻦ ﺟﻤﻼﺕ ﻓﺎﺭﺳﻲ ‪:‬‬

‫ﺟﻤﻼﺕ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍ ﺗﺮﺟﻤﻪ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻧﻘﻞ ﻗﻮﻝ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ‪.‬‬

‫‪ -1‬ﻓﺮﻭﺷﻨﺪﻩ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺸﺘﺮﻱ ﮔﻔﺖ ﻛﻪ ﭼﻨﺪ ﻛﻴﻠﻮ ﭼﺎﻱ ﻣﻲ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ‪.‬‬

‫‪ -2‬ﻣﺮﺩ ﺍﺯﻫﻤﺴﺮﺵ ﭘﺮﺳﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻛﻼﻫﺶ ﺭﺍ ﻛﺠﺎ ﺩﻳﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬

‫‪ -3‬ﻣﻌﻠﻢ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺤﺼﻞﻫﺎ ﮔﻔﺖ ﻛﻪ ﭘﻨﺞ ﺷﻨﺒﻪ ﺩﺭﺱ ‪ 2‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﭘﺮﺳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪ -4‬ﺁﻗﺎﻱ ﺑﺮﺍﻭﻥ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻦ ﮔﻔﺖ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺩﺭ ﺁﻥ ﺟﻠﺴﻪ ﺷﺮﻛﺖ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪ -5‬ﺳﻮﺯﺍﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻭﺳﺘﺎﻧﺶ ﮔﻔﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺁﻥ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺭﺍ ﺩﻭﺳﺖ ﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ‪.‬‬

‫‪ -6‬ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺎ ﭘﺮﺳﻴﺪﻧﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻛﺪﺍﻡ ﺧﺎﻧﻪ ﺯﻧﺪﮔﻲ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ ‪.‬‬

‫‪ -7‬ﺷﺎﮔﺮﺩ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻌﻠﻤﺶ ﭘﺮﺳﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﭼﻪ ﺳﺎﻋﺘﻲ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺩﺭ ﻛﻼﺱ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ‪.‬‬

‫‪ -8‬ﻣﺪﻳﺮ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻨﺸﻲ ﮔﻔﺖ ﻛﻪ ﻧﻤﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ‪ 5‬ﺑﻪ ﺍﻭ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺑﺰﻧﺪ ‪.‬‬

‫‪-9‬ﻣﺎ ﺍﺯ ﻫﻤﺴﺎﻳﻪ ﻣﺎﻥ ﭘﺮﺳﻴﺪﻳﻢ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺭﺍ ﭼﻄﻮﺭ ﺑﺎﺯ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ‪.‬‬

‫‪-10‬ﺑﭽﻪ ﻫﺎ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻦ ﮔﻔﺘﻨﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺁﻥ ﺷﻴﺸﻪ ﺭﺍ ﻧﺸﻜﺴﺘﻪ ﺍﻧﺪ ‪.‬‬

‫‪176‬‬
 ‫ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻧﻘﻞ ﻗﻮﻝ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﺳﺌﻮﺍﻟﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎ ﻛﻠﻤﻪ ﭘﺮﺳﺸﻲ ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﻧﺸﺪﻩ ﺑﻪ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ‪:‬‬

‫ﻃﺮﻳﻘﻪ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻳﻚ ﻗﻮﻝ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﺳﺌﻮﺍﻟﻲ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ‪.‬‬

‫”?‪Helen said to Bob, “do you live in Tehran‬‬

‫ﻣﺮﺍﺣﻞ ﺫﻛﺮ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺑﺠﺪ ﺭﺍ ﻃﻲ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺗﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﻛﻪ ﻛﻠﻤﻪ ﺭﺑﻂ ﺩﺭ ﭼﻨﻴﻦ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻫﺎﻳﻲ ‪ if‬و ‪ whether‬ﻫـﺮ ﺩﻭ ﺑـﻪ‬

‫ﻼ‪:‬‬
‫ﻣﻌﻨﻲ ) ﻛﻪ ﺁﻳﺎ ( ﺍﺳﺖ ﻣﺜ ﹰ‬

‫‪Helen asked Bob if he lived in Tehran.‬‬

‫ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺩﺍﻧﺴﺖ ﻛﻪ‬ ‫ﻓﻌﻞ ﻧﺎﻗﻞ ﻳﺎ ﮔﺰﺍﺭﺷﮕﺮ ﻧﻴﺰ ﺩﺭ ﭼﻨﻴﻦ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻠﺖ ﺳﺆﺍﻟﻲ ﺑﻮﺩﻥ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ‪ask‬‬

‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ‪ if‬ﻭ ‪ whether‬ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺳﺆﺍﻟﻲ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻧﻤﻲ ﺭﻭﺩ ﺑﻠﻜﻪ ﺧﺒﺮﻱ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬

‫ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻧﻘﻞ ﻗﻮﻝ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﻣﺮﻱ ﺑﻪ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ‪:‬‬

‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻳﻚ ﻧﻘﻞ ﻗﻮﻝ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﻣﺮﻱ ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻜﻞ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ‪:‬‬

‫”‪Helen said to Bob, “open the door.‬‬

‫ﻣﺮﺍﺣﻞ ﺫﻛﺮ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺭﺍ ﻃﻲ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺗﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﭼﻨﻴﻦ ﻧﻘﻞ ﻗﻮﻟﻬﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻠﻤﻪ ﺭﺍﺑﻂ )‪ (to‬ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻓﻌﻞ‬

‫ﺍﻣﺮ ﻣﻨﻔﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ) ‪ ( not to‬ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺑﻮﺩ ﻣﺜ ﹰ‬

‫ﻼ‪:‬‬

‫‪Helen told Bob to open the door.‬‬

‫”‪Helen said to Bob, “don’t open the door.‬‬
‫‪Helen told Bob not to open the door.‬‬

‫ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻴﻜﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻘﻞ ﻗﻮﻝ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﻋﻼﻭﻩ ﺑﺮ ﻓﻌﻞ ﺍﻣﺮ ﻳﻚ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻳﺎ ﺩﻭ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻳﺎ ﭼﻨﺪ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﻧﻴﺰ ﭘﻴﺮﻭﻱ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‬

‫ﻼ‪:‬‬
‫ﻣﺜ ﹰ‬

‫”‪Helen said to Bob, “open the door before you come in.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺩﺭ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻓﻌﻞ ﺍﻣﺮ ﺑﺎ ‪ to‬ﺭﺑﻂ ﭘﻴﺪﺍ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ ﻭ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﭘﻴﺮﻭ ﻣﺸﻤﻮﻝ ﺗﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻣﻲ‬

‫ﺷﻮﺩ ﺑﺪﻳﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ‪:‬‬

‫‪Helen told Bob to open the door before he comes in.‬‬

‫‪177‬‬
 ‫ﺗﻤﺮﻳﻦ ﺟﻤﻼﺕ ﻓﺎﺭﺳﻲ ‪:‬‬

‫ﺟﻤﻼﺕ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻧﮕﻠﻴﺴﯽ ﺗﺮﺟﻤﻪ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪ -1‬ﻣﻦ ﻗﺼﺪ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻢ ﺑﺪﻫﻢ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻨﻢ ﺑﺎﺯﺩﻳﺪ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺍﻣﺎ ﻭﻗﺖ ﻛﺎﻓﻲ ﭘﻴﺪﺍ ﻧﻜﺮﺩﻡ‪.‬‬

‫‪ -2‬ﺍﻭ ﮔﻔﺖ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺑﺪﻫﺪ ﺧﺎﻧﻪ ﺍﺵ ﺗﺰﺋﻴﻦ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫‪ -3‬ﺑﺪﻩ ﻛﻔﺸﻬﺎﻳﺖ ﺑﺮﻕ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺧﺘﻪ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻭ ﻣﻮﻫﺎﻳﺖ ﻛﻮﺗﺎﻩ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫‪ -4‬ﺍﻭ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﻋﺮﻭﺳﻲ ﺑﺪﻫﺪ ﻛﺖ ﻭ ﺷﻠﻮﺍﺭﺵ ﺍﻃﻮ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫‪ -5‬ﻣﺎ ﻣﺠﺒﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﻢ ﺑﻮﺩ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺪﻫﻴﻢ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻨﻬﺎﻳﻤﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻧﮓ ﺑﺰﻧﻨﺪ‪.‬‬

‫ﺟﻤﻼﺕ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍ ﺗﺮﺟﻤﻪ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻧﻘﻞ ﻗﻮﻝ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪ -1‬ﻗﺎﺿﻲ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺮﺩ ﭘﺮﺳﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺁﻥ ﺗﺼﺎﺩﻑ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﭼﻪ ﺳﺎﻋﺘﻲ ﺩﻳﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬

‫‪ -2‬ﭘﻠﻴﺲ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺯﺩ ﮔﻔﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺳﺘﻬﺎﻳﺶ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﻻ ﺑﺒﺮﺩ ﻭ ﺭﻭ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻳﻮﺍﺭ ﺑﺎﻳﺴﺘﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪ -3‬ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻧﺪﻩ ﺑﻪ ﺳﺮﺑﺎﺯﻫﺎ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ﺩﺍﺩ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻨﻜﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺭﻭﺩﺧﺎﻧﻪ ﺭﺳﻴﺪﻧﺪ ﭼﺎﺩﺭﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﭘﺎ ﻛﻨﻨﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪ -4‬ﻣﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻭﺳﺘﺎﻧﻤﺎﻥ ﮔﻔﺘﻴﻢ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺧﻴﺎﺑﺎﻥ ﺷﻠﻮﻍ ﻓﻮﺗﺒﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﺯﻱ ﻧﻜﻨﻨﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪ -5‬ﻣﻌﻠﻢ ﺍﺯ ﺷﺎﮔﺮﺩﻫﺎ ﭘﺮﺳﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺁﻳﺎ ﻫﻤﻪ ﺗﻜﺎﻟﻴﻒ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺍﻧﺪ؟‬

‫ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﺻﻄﻼﺣﺎﺕ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻭ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻘﻞ ﻗﻮﻝ ﻏﻴﺮ‬

‫ﺑﻪ ﺷﺮﻁ ﺍﻳﻨﻜﻪ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻭ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﮔﺰﺍﺭﺵ ﺩﻫﻨﺪﻩ ﺑﺎ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻭ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﮔﻮﻳﻨﺪﻩ ﻗﻮﻝ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺑﻌﻀﻲ ﺍﺯ‬

‫ﺍﺻﻄﻼﺣﺎﺕ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻭ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻭ ﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﺷﺎﺭﻩ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪178‬‬
 The following + ‫ﻗﻴﺪ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ‬
next + ‫→ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ‬ The next + ‫ﻗﻴﺪ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ‬
The + ‫ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ‬+ after

The + ‫ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ‬+ before

last + ‫ﻗﻴﺪ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ‬ →
The + previous + ‫ﻗﻴﺪ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ‬

today → that day

tonight → that night
now → then
here → there
come → go
this → that

Helen said to Bob, “I will meet you next week.”

Helen told Bob that she would meet him the next week.

179
 ‫ﻃﺮﻳﻘﻪ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻧﻘﻞ ﻗﻮﻝ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﺗﻌﺠﺒﻲ ﺑﻪ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ‪:‬‬

‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻨﻜﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻘﻞ ﻗﻮﻝ ﭼﻨﻴﻦ ﺟﻤﻼﺗﻲ ﺑﺤﺚ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻻﺯﻡ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍ ﻳﺎﺩ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﻢ ﻛﻪ ﺟﻤﻼﺕ ﺗﻌﺠﺒﻲ ﭼﮕﻮﻧﻪ ﺑﻴﺎﻥ‬

‫ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺗﻌﺠﺒﻲ ﻳﺎ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﻌﺠﺐ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺭﻭﺩ ﻛﻪ ﺍﻟﮕﻮﻱ ﺁﻥ ﺑﺪﻳﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺍﺳﺖ‪:‬‬

‫!‪What a nice car it is‬‬

‫! ﻓﻌﻞ ‪ +‬ﺿﻤﻴﺮ ‪ /‬ﺍﺳﻢ ‪ +‬ﺍﺳﻢ ‪ +‬ﺻﻔﺖ ‪what + a/an +‬‬

‫ﻭﻳﺎ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﻌﺠﺐ ﺍﺯ ﻓﻌﻞ ﻭ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻛﺎﺭﻱ ﺑﻴﺎﻥ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻛﻪ ﺍﻟﮕﻮﻱ ﺁﻥ ﺑﺪﻳﻦ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺍﺳﺖ ‪:‬‬

‫! ﻓﻌﻞ ‪ +‬ﺿﻤﻴﺮ ‪ /‬ﺍﺳﻢ ‪ +‬ﻗﻴﺪ ‪how +‬‬

‫!‪How slowly she drives‬‬

‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻳﻚ ﻧﻘﻞ ﻗﻮﻝ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﺗﻌﺠﺒﻲ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ‬

‫”!‪Helen said, “how slowly the man works‬‬

‫ﻣﺮﺍﺣﻞ ﺫﻛﺮ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺑﺠﺪ ﺭﺍ ﻃﻲ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺗﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﻛﻪ ﻛﻠﻤﻪ ﺭﺑﻂ ﺩﺭ ﭼﻨﻴﻦ ﺟﻤﻼﺗﻲ ﺑﺎ ‪ what‬ﻭ ﻳﺎ ‪ how‬ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺑﻮﺩ‬

‫‪Helen exclaimed how slowly the man worked.‬‬

‫‪180‬‬
 ‫ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ) ‪( gerund‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﻢ‬

‫ﺍﺳﻢ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻧﮕﻠﻴﺴﻲ ﺍﺳﻤﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺍﺯ ﻓﻌﻞ ﻣﺸﺘﻖ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻤﺎﻥ ﺁﻥ ﺑﺪﻳﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺁﺧـﺮ ﻫـﺮ‬

‫ﻓﻌﻞ ‪ ing‬ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺑﻪ ﺍﺳﻢ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫ﺯﻧﺪﮔﻲ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ‬ ‫‪live‬‬ ‫‪Æ living‬‬ ‫ﺯﻧﺪﻩ‬

‫ﺑﻮﺩﻥ‬ ‫‪be Æ‬‬ ‫‪being‬‬ ‫ﺑﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﻫﺴﺘﻲ‪ ،‬ﻭﺟﻮﺩ‬

‫ﻛﺎﺭﺑﺮﺩﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﺳﻢ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻧﮕﻠﻴﺴﻲ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺗﻨﺪ ﺍﺯ ‪:‬‬

‫‪ -1‬ﻫﺮ ﮔﺎﻩ ﻻﺯﻡ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺮﻑ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﻓﻌﻞ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺭﻭﺩ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺍﺳﻢ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻧﻪ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺑﺎ ‪ . to‬ﺩﻟﻴـﻞ ﺁﻥ ﻧﻴـﺰ‬

‫ﻼ‪:‬‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺣﺮﻑ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﻫﻤﻴﺸﻪ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻣﺜ ﹰ‬

‫‪After locking the door, I left home.‬‬

‫‪She is afraid of telling lies.‬‬
‫‪ -2‬ﻫﺮ ﮔﺎﻩ ﻻﺯﻡ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺍﻱ ﺑﺎ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﺷﻮﺩ ﭼﻮﻥ ﻧﻤﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺑﺎ ‪ to‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻓﺎﻋﻞ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺑﻪ‬

‫ﻛﺎﺭ ﺑﺮﺩ ﺁﻧﺮﺍ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺑﻪ ﺍﺳﻢ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ‪:‬‬

‫‪To swim here is enjoyable.‬‬

‫‪Swimming here is enjoyable.‬‬

‫‪ -3‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻧﮕﻠﻴﺴﻲ ﺍﮔﺮ ﻓﻌﻞ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺭﻭﺩ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺑﻪ ﺍﺳﻢ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺷﻮﺩ‪:‬‬

‫‪avoid‬‬ ‫ﺍﺟﺘﻨﺎﺏ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ‬ ‫‪defer‬‬ ‫ﺑﻪ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﻖ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺧﺘﻦ – ﻟﻐﻮ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ‬

‫‪appreciate‬‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺴﻴﻦ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ‬ ‫‪delay‬‬ ‫ﺑﻪ ﺗﺄﺧﻴﺮ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺧﺘﻦ‬
‫‪admit‬‬ ‫ﭘﺬﻳﺮﻓﺘﻦ‬ ‫‪advise‬‬ ‫ﻧﺼﺤﻴﺖ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ‬
‫‪discuss‬‬ ‫ﺑﺤﺚ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ‬ ‫‪detest‬‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻔﺮ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻦ‬
‫‪consider‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺭﺳﻲ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ‬ ‫‪enjoy‬‬ ‫ﻟﺬﺕ ﺑﺮﺩﻥ‬
‫‪can’t help‬‬ ‫ﭼﺎﺭﻩ ﻧﺪﺍﺷﺘﻦ‬ ‫‪finish‬‬ ‫ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ‬

‫‪181‬‬
‫‪deny‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﻜﺎﺭ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ‬ ‫‪forgive‬‬ ‫ﻋﻔﻮ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ‬
‫‪forbid‬‬ ‫ﻗﺪﻏﻦ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ‬ ‫‪include‬‬ ‫ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﺷﺪﻥ‬
‫‪imagine‬‬ ‫ﺗﺼﻮﺭ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ‬ ‫‪keep‬‬ ‫ﺍﺩﺍﻣﻪ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ‬
‫‪mention‬‬ ‫ﻳﺎﺩﺁﻭﺭﻱ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ‬ ‫‪oppose‬‬ ‫ﻣﺨﺎﻟﻔﺖ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ‬
‫‪mind‬‬ ‫ﺍﻫﻤﻴﺖ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ‬ ‫‪quit‬‬ ‫ﺗﺮﻙ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ‬
‫‪postpone‬‬ ‫ﻟﻐﻮ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ‬ ‫‪risk‬‬ ‫ﺑﻪ ﺧﻄﺮ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺧﺘﻦ‬
‫‪practice‬‬ ‫ﺗﻤﺮﻳﻦ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ‬ ‫‪remember‬‬ ‫ﺑﻪ ﺧﺎﻃﺮ ﺳﭙﺮﺩﻥ‬
‫‪resume‬‬ ‫ﺍﺯ ﺳﺮ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ‬ ‫‪stop‬‬ ‫ﺩﺳﺖ ﻛﺸﻴﺪﻥ‬
‫‪suggest‬‬ ‫ﭘﻴﺸﻨﻬﺎﺩ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ‬ ‫‪tolerate‬‬ ‫ﺗﺤﻤﻞ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ‬
‫‪understand‬‬ ‫ﻓﻬﻤﻴﺪﻥ‬

‫‪I enjoy reading the newspaper.‬‬

‫ﻼ‪:‬‬
‫ﻧﻜﺘﻪ ﻣﻬﻢ ‪ :‬ﭼﻮﻥ ﺍﺳﻢ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺟﻨﺒﻪ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﭘﺲ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺻﻔﺖ ﻣﻠﻜﻲ ﻳﺎ ﺣﺘﻲ )‪ (′s‬ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺭﻭﺩ ﻣﺜ ﹰ‬

‫‪I appreciate her speaking.‬‬

‫‪I appreciate Helen’s speaking.‬‬

‫ﺗﻤﺮﻳﻦ ﺟﻤﻼﺕ ﻓﺎﺭﺳﻲ ‪:‬‬

‫ﺟﻤﻼﺕ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺮﺟﻤﻪ ﻧﻤﻮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺠﻬﻮﻝ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ‪:‬‬

‫‪ -1‬ﻓﻜﺮ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻢ ﺁﻥ ﺑﭽﻪ ﺁﻥ ﺩﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺷﻜﺴﺘﻪ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬

‫‪ -2‬ﻣﺪﻳﺮ ﺩﻳﺮﻭﺯ ﺁﻗﺎﻱ ﺑﺮﺍﻭﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺩﺍﺭﻩ ﻣﻨﺘﻘﻞ ﻛﺮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫‪ -3‬ﺍﻭ ﻛﻴﻔﺶ ﺭﺍ ﭘﺸﺖ ﺩﺭ ﮔﺬﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﻮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫‪ -4‬ﺩﻛﺘﺮ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﭼﺸﻢ ﺑﭽﻪ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺠﻪ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪ -5‬ﻗﺼﺪ ﺩﺍﺭﻡ ﺑﺪﻫﻢ ﻳﻚ ﺩﺭ ﭼﻮﺑﻲ ﻧﺠﺎﺭ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﻃﺎﻕ ﺩﺭﺳﺖ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪182‬‬
 ‫ﺗﻤﺮﻳﻦ ﺟﻤﻼﺕ ﻓﺎﺭﺳﻲ ‪:‬‬

‫ﺟﻤﻼﺕ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺮﺟﻤﻪ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻧﻘﻞ ﻗﻮﻝ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪ -1‬ﻓﺮﻭﺷﻨﺪﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺸﺘﺮﻱ ﭘﺮﺳﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻛﺪﺍﻡ ﭘﻴﺮﺍﻫﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺩﻭﺳﺖ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪ -2‬ﻣﻌﻠﻢ ﺍﺯ ﺷﺎﮔﺮﺩﺍﻥ ﭘﺮﺳﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﭼﺮﺍ ﺁﻥ ﺩﻳﺎﻟﻮﮒ ﺭﺍ ﺣﻔﻆ ﻧﻜﺮﺩﻩ ﺍﻧﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪ -3‬ﻣﺮﺩ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ ﺑﭽﻪ ﭘﺮﺳﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺁﻳﺎ ﺁﻥ ﺁﺩﺭﺱ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻲ ﺩﺍﻧﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪ -4‬ﺍﻭ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻭﺳﺘﺶ ﮔﻔﺖ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺭﻭﺯ ﺟﻤﻌﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﮕﺎﻩ ﺑﺮﻭﺩ‪.‬‬

‫‪ -5‬ﺁﻗﺎﻱ ﺑﺮﺍﻭﻥ ﺑﻪ ﻫﻤﺴﺮﺵ ﮔﻔﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻧﻬﺎﺭ ﺗﺎﺱ ﻛﺒﺎﺏ ﺩﺭﺳﺖ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬

‫ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺩﺍﻧﺴﺖ ﻛﻪ ‪ :‬ﭼﻮﻥ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻓﻌﻠﻬﺎ ﺍﺳﻢ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺭﻭﺩ ﮔﺎﻫﻲ ﻻﺯﻡ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ ﺍﺳـﻢ ﻳـﻚ ﺻـﻔﺖ‬

‫ﻣﻠﻜﻲ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﻳﻚ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﺑﺎ )‪ (′s‬ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺭﻭﺩ‪.‬‬

‫‪I appreciate her working.‬‬

‫‪I appreciate Helen’s working.‬‬

‫‪183‬‬
 ‫ﻓﻌﻠﻬﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺍﺳﻢ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺑﺮﺩ ﻭ ﻫﻢ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺑﺎ ‪:to‬‬

‫ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩﻱ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺍﻧﮕﻠﻴﺴﻲ ﻣﺜﻞ ‪ prefer‬ﻭ ‪ start‬ﻭ ‪ plan‬ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻨﺪ ﻫﻢ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﻢ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺭﻭﻧﺪ ﻫﻢ ﺑﺎ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺑﺎ ‪to‬‬

‫ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻌﻨﻲ ﺍﺷﺎﻥ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﻱ ﭘﻴﺪﺍ ﻧﻤﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‪:‬‬

‫‪Helen prefers to go.‬‬

‫‪Helen prefers going.‬‬
‫ﺍﻣﺎ ﺩﻭ ﻓﻌﻞ ‪ remember , stop‬ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻜﻞ ﻓﻌﻠﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻌﺪﺷﺎﻥ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻣﻴﺮﻭﺩ ﻣﻌﺎﻧﻴﺸـﺎﻥ ﻓـﺮﻕ ﻣـﻲ ﻛﻨـﺪ ﺑـﻪ ﺍﻳـﻦ‬

‫ﺻﻮﺭﺕ‪:‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﻒ( ﺍﮔﺮ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ‪ stop‬ﺍﺳﻢ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺭﻭﺩ ﻣﻌﻨﻲ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺍﻳﻨﺴﺖ ﻛﻪ ﻓﺎﻋﻞ ﺍﺯ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ‪ stop‬ﺩﺳﺖ ﻛﺸﻴﺪﻩ ﻳﺎ ﻣﻲ‬

‫ﻼ‪:‬‬
‫ﻛﺸﺪ ﻳﺎ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﻛﺸﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﻣﺜ ﹰ‬

‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﺯ ﺻﺤﺒﺖ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺑﺎ ﻣﺮﺩ ﺩﺳﺖ ﻣﻲ ﻛﺸﻢ‪.‬‬

‫‪I stop speaking to the man.‬‬

‫ﺍﻣﺎ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ‪ stop‬ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺑﺎ ‪ to‬ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺭﻭﺩ ﻣﻌﻨﻲ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﻓﺎﻋﻞ ﺍﺯ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻗﺒﻞﺩﺳﺖ ﺑﺮﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﻳﺎ ﺑﺮ ﻣﻲ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪،‬‬

‫ﻳﺎ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺑﺮﺩﺍﺷﺖ ﺗﺎ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ‪ stop‬ﺭﺍ ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬

‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻳﺴﺘﺎﺩﻡ ﺗﺎ ﺑﺎ ﻣﺮﺩ ﺻﺤﺒﺖ ﻛﻨﻢ ‪.‬‬

‫‪I stopped to speak to the man.‬‬

‫ﺏ( ﺍﮔﺮ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ‪ remember‬ﺍﺳﻢ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺭﻭﺩ ﻣﻌﻨﻲ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﻓﺎﻋﻞ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ‪ remember‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ‬

‫ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﻱ ﺍﺯ ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﻪ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﻲ ﺁﻭﺭﺩ‪.‬‬

‫ﻫﻠﻦ ﺑﺴﺘﻦ ﺩﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻳﺎﺩ ﻣﻲ ﺁﻭﺭﺩ‪.‬‬

‫‪Helen remembers locking the door.‬‬

‫ﺍﻣﺎ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ‪ remember‬ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺑﺎ ‪ to‬ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺭﻭﺩ ﻣﻌﻨﻲ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﻓﺎﻋﻞ ﻳﺎﺩﺵ ﻣﻲ ﻣﺎﻧﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻛـﺎﺭ ﺑﻌـﺪ ﺍﺯ‬

‫‪ remember‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺩﻫﺪ ﻭ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺮﺍﻣﻮﺵ ﻧﻤﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﻭﺍﻗﻊ ﺍﻳﻦ ‪ remember‬ﻣﺘﺮﺍﺩﻑ ﺑﺎ ) ‪ ( not forget‬ﺍﺳﺖ‬

‫ﻼ‪:‬‬
‫ﻣﺜ ﹰ‬

‫ﻫﻠﻦ ﻳﺎﺩﺵ ﻣﻲ ﻣﺎﻧﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺭﺍ ﻗﻔﻞ ﻛﻨﺪ ‪.‬‬

‫‪Helen remembers to lock the door.‬‬

‫‪184‬‬
 ‫ﺑﺤﺚ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ‪:‬‬

‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺩﺭ ﺩﻭ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻟﻲ ﻓﺎﻋﻞ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﻱ ﺩﻭ ﻓﻌﻞ ﺭﺍ ﻫﻤﺰﻣﺎﻥ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻧﺪﺍﺩﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ ﺑﻠﻜﻪ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻓﻌﻞ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺍﻭﻝ ﻭ‬

‫‪she parked the car. She went shopping.‬‬ ‫ﻼ‪:‬‬

‫ﻓﻌﻞ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺩﻭﻡ ﻳﻚ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻣﺜ ﹰ‬

‫ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﭘﻴﻮﻧﺪ ﺩﻭ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻓﻌﻞ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺍﻭﻝ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺑـﻪ ﺻـﻔﺖ ﻓـﺎﻋﻠﻲ ﻛﺎﻣـﻞ ﻣـﻲ ﻛﻨـﻴﻢ ‪(Present .‬‬

‫)‪ prefect‬ﻛﻪ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻤﺎﻥ ﺁﻥ ﺑﺪﻳﻦ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺍﺳﺖ‪:‬‬

‫‪Have + ing + p.p‬‬

‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‪:‬‬

‫‪( after ) having parked the car, she went shopping.‬‬

‫ﭘﺎﻳﺎﻥ‬

‫‪185‬‬